Regulatory Guide 1.165: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
Line 15: Line 15:
| page count = 47
| page count = 47
}}
}}
{{#Wiki_filter:U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION                                                                                       March 1997
{{#Wiki_filter:U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION  
                                                                                                                                                                      :E
Ma REGULATORY GUll OFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCH  
                                        REGULATORY GUll OFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCH
REGULATORY GUIDE 1.165 S(Draft was DG-1 032)  
                                                                REGULATORY GUIDE 1.165 S(Draft was DG-1 032)
IDENTIFICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF SEISMIC SOURCES AND  
                      IDENTIFICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF SEISMIC SOURCES AND
DETERMINATION OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
                      DETERMINATION OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
rch 1997
:E


==A. INTRODUCTION==
==A. INTRODUCTION==
In 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," Sec tion 100.23, "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors,"
paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engi neering Characteristics," requires that the geological, seismological, and engineering characteristics of a site and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and detail to permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed site, to provide sufficient information to support evalu ations performed to arrive at estimates of the Safe Shut down Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), and to permit adequate engineering solutions to actual or potential geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site. Data on the vibratory ground motion, tectonic surface de formation, nontectonic deformation, earthquake recur rence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site founda tion material, and seismically induced floods, water waves, and other siting factors will be obtained by re viewing pertinent literature and carrying out field investigations.
. In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d), "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors," requires that the geologic and seismic siting factors considered for design include a determination of the SSE for the site, the potential for surface tectonic and nontectonic deformations, the de- USNRC REGULATORY GUIDES
Regulatory Guides wre Issued to describe and make available to the public such informa lion as methods acceptable to the NRC staff for Implementing specific parts of the Com missions reguldion, techniques used by the staff In aluaftng specific problems orpoe Uated accidents, and data needed by he NRC staff In Its review of applicatiors for per mits aid licenses. Regulatory guides we not substitutes for regulations, and compliance with themn Is not required. Methods and aloutions different from those set out In the Ogides will be acceptable I #W provide a basis for the f*wngs requisfte to the issuance or con.
tiriance of a permit or icense by fth Commission.
This guide was issued after consideration of comments received trom the public. Com ments and suggestlons for rmprovements In these guides reancouraged at anlnts, and guides will be revlseds appropriate, to scomrnodste comments and to ref:ect now in formation or aperlence.
Written commerts may be submrted to fte Rules Review and Directives Branch. CFIPS,
ADM, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington. DC 20555-0001.
sign bases for seismically induced floods and water waves, and other design conditions.
sign bases for seismically induced floods and water waves, and other design conditions.


In 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," Sec                                            In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (dX1), "Determina tion 100.23, "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors,"                                          tion of the Safe -Shutdown Earthquake Ground Mo paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engi                                          tion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of neering Characteristics," requires that the geological,                                      the SSE be addressed through an appropriate analysis, seismological, and engineering characteristics of a site                                    such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis or suit and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and                                     able sensitivity analyses.
In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (dX1), "Determina tion of the Safe -Shutdown Earthquake Ground Mo tion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of the SSE be addressed through an appropriate analysis, such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis or suit able sensitivity analyses.
 
This guide has been developed to provide general guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRC staff for
(1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting proba bilistic seismic hazard analyses, and (4) determining the SSE for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR
100.23.


detail to permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed This guide has been developed to provide general site, to provide sufficient information to support evalu guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRC staff for ations performed to arrive at estimates of the Safe Shut
This guide contains several appendices that ad dress the objectives stated above. Appendix A con tains a list of definitions of pertinent terms. Appendix B describes the procedure used to determine the refer ence probability for the SSE exceedance level that is acceptable to the staff. Appendix C discusses the de velopment of a seismic hazard information base and the determination of the probabilistic ground motion level and controlling earthquakes. Appendix D dis cusses site-specific geological, seismological, and
                                                                                            (1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, down Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), and to permit and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and adequate engineering solutions to actual or potential characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting proba geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site. Data bilistic seismic hazard analyses, and (4) determining on the vibratory ground motion, tectonic surface de the SSE for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR
"The guides we issued In the following ten broad divisions:
formation, nontectonic deformation, earthquake recur
                                                                                              100.23.


rence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site founda tion material, and seismically induced floods, water                                                This guide contains several appendices that ad waves, and other siting factors will be obtained by re                                        dress the objectives stated above. Appendix A con viewing pertinent literature and carrying out field                                          tains a list of definitions of pertinent terms. Appendix investigations.                                                                              B describes the procedure used to determine the refer ence probability for the SSE exceedance level that is
===1. Power Reactors ===
    . In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d), "Geologic and                                        acceptable to the staff. Appendix C discusses the de Seismic Siting Factors," requires that the geologic and                                      velopment of a seismic hazard information base and seismic siting factors considered for design include a                                        the determination of the probabilistic ground motion determination of the SSE for the site, the potential for                                      level and controlling earthquakes. Appendix D dis surface tectonic and nontectonic deformations, the de-                                        cusses site-specific geological, seismological, and USNRC REGULATORY GUIDES                                        "The guides we issued In the following ten broad divisions:
2. .Research and Test Reactors  
Regulatory Guides wre Issued to describe and make available to the public such informa lion as methods acceptable to the NRC staff for Implementing specific parts of the Com      1. Power Reactors                               6. Products missions reguldion, techniques used by the staff In aluaftng specific problems orpoe        2. .Research and Test Reactors                 7. Transportation Uated accidents, and data needed by he NRC staff InIts review of applicatiors for per      & Fuels and Materials Facilities               8. Occupational Health mits aid licenses. Regulatory guides we not substitutes for regulations, and compliance    4. Environmental and Siting                     9. Antilrust and Financial Review with themn Is not required. Methods and aloutions different from those set out Inthe Ogides & Materials and Plant Protection               10. General will be acceptable I #W provide a basis for the f*wngs requisfte to the issuance or con.
& Fuels and Materials Facilities  
4. Environmental and Siting  
& Materials and Plant Protection


tiriance of a permit or icense by fthCommission.
===6. Products ===


Sinogle copies of regulatory guides may be obtained hre of charge by writng the Office of This guide was issued after consideration of comments received trom the public. Com        Administration. Attention: Distribution end Moi Services Section, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory ments and suggestlons for rmprovements In these guides reancouraged at anlnts, and          Cornmission Washinglon. DC 20555-0001; or by fla at (301)4162260.
===7. Transportation ===


guides will be revlseds appropriate, to scomrnodste comments and to ref:ect now in formation or aperlence.
===8. Occupational Health ===
9. Antilrust and Financial Review
10. General Sinogle copies of regulatory guides may be obtained hre of charge by writng the Office of Administration. Attention: Distribution end Moi Services Section, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Cornmission Washinglon. DC 20555-0001; or by fla at (301)4162260.


issued guides may also be purchased from the National Technical Information Service on Written commerts may be submrted to fte Rules Review and Directives Branch. CFIPS,          a standing order basis. Dleails on this service may be obtained by writing NTIS, 5285 Port ADM, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington. DC 20555-0001.                        Royal Road, Springf*eld, VA 22161.
issued guides may also be purchased from the National Technical Information Service on a standing order basis. Dleails on this service may be obtained by writing NTIS, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springf*eld, VA 22161.


geophysical investigations. Appendix E describes a           cal parameters. A PSHA also provides an evaluation method to confirm the adequacy of existing seismic           of the likelihood of SSE recurrence during the design sources and source parameters as the basis for deter         lifetime of a given facility, given the recurrence inter mining the SSE for a site. Appendix F describes pro           val and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent cedures to determine the SSE.                                seismic sources. Within the framework of a probabil istic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of The information collections contained in this regu seismic sources and ground motions are identified latory guide are covered by the requirements of 10 CFR
geophysical investigations. Appendix E describes a method to confirm the adequacy of existing seismic sources and source parameters as the basis for deter mining the SSE for a site. Appendix F describes pro cedures to determine the SSE.
Part 50, which were approved by the Office of Manage          and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the SSE. The role of geologi ment and Budget, approval number 3150-0011. The cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations is NRC may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not to develop geosciences information about the site for required to respond to, a collection of information un use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as less it displays a currently valid OMB control number.


well as to ensure that the seismic hazard analysis is  
The information collections contained in this regu latory guide are covered by the requirements of 10 CFR
Part 50, which were approved by the Office of Manage ment and Budget, approval number 3150-0011. The NRC may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information un less it displays a currently valid OMB control number.


==B. DISCUSSION==
==B. DISCUSSION==
based on up-to-date information.
BACKGROUND
A probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)
has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to de termine the SSE and account for uncertainties in the seismological and geological evaluations. The rule fur ther recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the ap propriate approach to account for it depend on the tec tonic regime and parameters such as the knowledge of seismic sources, the existence of historical and re corded data, and the level of understanding of the tec tonics. Therefore, methods other than probabilistic methods such as sensitivity analyses may be adequate for some sites to account for uncertainties.


BACKGROUND                                                        Experience in performing seismic hazard evalua tions in active plate-margin regions in the Western A probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)          United States (for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to de        fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has termine the SSE and account for uncertainties in the         also identified uncertainties associatedwith the char seismological and geological evaluations. The rule fur        acterization of seismic sources (Refs. 1-3). Sources ther recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the ap    of uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture seg propriate approach to account for it depend on the tec        mentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, tonic regime and parameters such as the knowledge of          ground motion, and earthquake occurrence model seismic sources, the existence of historical and re          ing. As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative corded data, and the level of understanding of the tec        hypotheses and parameters must be considered to ac tonics. Therefore, methods other than probabilistic          count for these uncertainties.
-Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Crite ria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100 is primarily based on a deterministic methodology. Past licensing experience in applying Appendix A has dem onstrated the need to formulate procedures that quanti tatively incorporate uncertainty (including alternative scientific interpretations) in the evaluation of seismic hazards. A single deterministic representation of seis mic sources and ground motions at a site may not explicitly provide a quantitative representation of the uncertainties in geological, seismological, and geo physical data and alternative scientific interpretations.


methods such as sensitivity analyses may be adequate for some sites to account for uncertainties.                      Uncertainties associated with the identification
Probabilistic procedures were developed during the past 10 to 15 years specifically for nuclear power plant seismic hazard assessments in the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) (the area east of the Rocky Mountains), also referred to as the Stable Con tinent Region (SCR). These procedures provide a structured approach for decisionmaking with respect to the SSE when performed together with site-specif ic investigations. A PSHA provides a framework to address the uncertainties associated with the identifi cation and characterization of seismic sources by in corporating multiple interpretations of seismologi- cal parameters. A PSHA also provides an evaluation of the likelihood of SSE recurrence during the design lifetime of a given facility, given the recurrence inter val and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent seismic sources. Within the framework of a probabil istic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources and ground motions are identified and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the SSE. The role of geologi cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop geosciences information about the site for use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as well as to ensure that the seismic hazard analysis is based on up-to-date information.
    -Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Crite          and characterization of seismic sources in tectonic en vironments in both the CEUS and the Western United ria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100 is         States should be evaluated. Therefore, the same basic primarily based on a deterministic methodology. Past          approach can be applied to determine the SSE.


licensing experience in applying Appendix A has dem onstrated the need to formulate procedures that quanti        APPROACH
Experience in performing seismic hazard evalua tions in active plate-margin regions in the Western United States (for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has also identified uncertainties associatedwith the char acterization of seismic sources (Refs. 1-3). Sources of uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture seg mentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, ground motion, and earthquake occurrence model ing. As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative hypotheses and parameters must be considered to ac count for these uncertainties.
tatively incorporate uncertainty (including alternative            The general process to determine the SSE at a site scientific interpretations) in the evaluation of seismic     includes:
hazards. A single deterministic representation of seis mic sources and ground motions at a site may not                  1. Site- and region-specific geological, seismo explicitly provide a quantitative representation of the                logical, geophysical, and geotechnical inves uncertainties in geological, seismological, and geo                    tigations and physical data and alternative scientific interpretations.


Uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources in tectonic en vironments in both the CEUS and the Western United States should be evaluated. Therefore, the same basic approach can be applied to determine the SSE.
APPROACH
The general process to determine the SSE at a site includes:
1. Site- and region-specific geological, seismo logical, geophysical, and geotechnical inves tigations and
2. A probabilistic seismic hazard assessment.
2. A probabilistic seismic hazard assessment.


Probabilistic procedures were developed during the past 10 to 15 years specifically for nuclear power        CENTRAL AND EASTERN UNITED STATES
CENTRAL AND EASTERN UNITED STATES  
plant seismic hazard assessments in the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) (the area east of the                The CEUS is considered to be that part of the Rocky Mountains), also referred to as the Stable Con          United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, or tinent Region (SCR). These procedures provide a              east of Longitude 1050 West (Refs. 4, 5). To deter structured approach for decisionmaking with respect          mine the SSE in the CEUS, an accepted PSHAmeth to the SSE when performed together with site-specif          odology with a range of credible alternative input in ic investigations. A PSHA provides a framework to address the uncertainties associated with the identifi terpretations should be used. For sites in the CEUS,
The CEUS is considered to be that part of the United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, or east of Longitude 1050 West (Refs. 4, 5). To deter mine the SSE in the CEUS, an accepted PSHAmeth odology with a range of credible alternative input in terpretations should be used. For sites in the CEUS,  
                                                              the seismic hazard methods, the data developed, and     K
the seismic hazard methods, the data developed, and seismic sources identified by Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 4-6) and the
cation and characterization of seismic sources by in          seismic sources identified by Lawrence Livermore corporating multiple interpretations of seismologi-          National Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 4-6) and the
1.165'-2 K
                                                      1.165'-2


Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Ref. 7)             that are known to be at or near the surface, (2) buried have been reviewed and accepted by the staff. The             (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at LLNL and EPRI studies developed data bases and               the earth's surface, and (3) subduction zone sources, scientific interpretations of available information           such as those in the Pacific Northwest. The nature of K 1 and determined seismic sources and source charac             surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface terizations for the CEUS (e.g., earthquake occur             and near-surface investigation techniques to assess ori rence rates, estimates of maximum magnitude).                 entation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc.
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Ref. 7)  
have been reviewed and accepted by the staff. The LLNL and EPRI studies developed data bases and scientific interpretations of available information K1 and determined seismic sources and source charac terizations for the CEUS (e.g., earthquake occur rence rates, estimates of maximum magnitude).
In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in the active plate-margin region because there is generally no clear association between seismicity and known tectonic structures or near-surface geology. In general, the observed geo logic structures were generated in response to tecton ic forces that no longer exist and have little or no cor relation with current tectonic forces. Therefore, it is important to account for this uncertainty by the use of multiple alternative models.


In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in the active plate-margin                Buried (blind) faults are often associated with region because there is generally no clear association        surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, or subsi between seismicity and known tectonic structures or          dence. The surface expression of blind faulting can near-surface geology. In general, the observed geo            be detected by mapping the uplifted or down-dropped logic structures were generated in response to tecton        geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey ic forces that no longer exist and have little or no cor      leveling, and geodetic methods. The nature of the relation with current tectonic forces. Therefore, it is      structure at depth can often be evaluated by core bor important to account for this uncertainty by the use of      ings and geophysical techniques.
The identification of seismic sources and reason able alternatives in the CEUS considers hypotheses presently advocated for the occurrence of earth quakes in the CEUS (for example, the reactivation of favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local am plification and release of stresses concentrated around a geologic structure). In tectonically active areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic Zone, where geological, seismological, and geo
.
physical evidence suggest the nature of the sources that generate the earthquakes, it may be more ap propriate to evaluate those seismic sources by using procedures similar to those normally applied in the Western United States.


multiple alternative models.                                       Continental United States subduction zones are lo The identification of seismic sources and reason        cated in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska. Seismic able alternatives in the CEUS considers hypotheses            sources associated with subduction zones are sources presently advocated for the occurrence of earth              within the overriding plate, on the interface between the quakes in the CEUS (for example, the reactivation of          subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local am          the interior of the downgoing oceanic slab. The charac plification and release of stresses concentrated              terization of subduction zone seismic sources includes around a geologic structure). In tectonically active          consideration of the three-dimensional geometry of the areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic            subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction Zone, where geological, seismological, and geo                zones, geometry of historical ruptures, constraints on
WESTERN UNITED STATES
.  physical evidence suggest the nature of the sources          the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and compar that generate the earthquakes, it may be more ap              isons with other subduction zones worldwide.
The Western United States is considered to be that part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky Mountain front, or west of approximately 1050 West Longitude. For the Western United States, an informa tion base of earth science data and scientific interpreta tions of seismic sources and source characterizations (e.g., geometry, seismicity parameters) comparable to the CEUS as documented in the LLNL and EPRI stud ies (Refs. 4-7) does not exist. For this region, specific interpretations on a site-by-site basis should be applied (Ref. 1). 
The active plate-margin region includes, for exam ple, coastal California, Oregon, Washington, and Alas ka. For the active plate-margin region, where earth quakes can often be correlated with known tectonic structures, those structures should be assessed for their earthquake and surface deformation potential. In this region, at least three types of sources exist: (1) faults that are known to be at or near the surface, (2) buried (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at the earth's surface, and (3) subduction zone sources, such as those in the Pacific Northwest. The nature of surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface and near-surface investigation techniques to assess ori entation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc.


propriate to evaluate those seismic sources by using              The Basin and Range region of the Western procedures similar to those normally applied in the          United States, and to a lesser extent the Pacific North Western United States.                                        west and the Central United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes. Temporal clustering is WESTERN UNITED STATES                                        best exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah and the Meers fault in cen The Western United States is considered to be that      tral Oklahoma, where several large late Holocene co part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky        seismic faulting events occurred at relatively close Mountain front, or west of approximately 1050 West            intervals (hundreds to thousands of years) that were Longitude. For the Western United States, an informa          preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted tion base of earth science data and scientific interpreta    thousands to tens of thousand years. Temporal clus tions of seismic sources and source characterizations        tering should be considered in these regions or wher (e.g., geometry, seismicity parameters) comparable to        ever paleoseismic evidence indicates that it has oc the CEUS as documented in the LLNL and EPRI stud              curred.
Buried (blind) faults are often associated with surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, or subsi dence. The surface expression of blind faulting can be detected by mapping the uplifted or down-dropped geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey leveling, and geodetic methods. The nature of the structure at depth can often be evaluated by core bor ings and geophysical techniques.


ies (Refs. 4-7) does not exist. For this region, specific interpretations on a site-by-site basis should be applied (Ref. 1).                                                              
Continental United States subduction zones are lo cated in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska. Seismic sources associated with subduction zones are sources within the overriding plate, on the interface between the subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in the interior of the downgoing oceanic slab. The charac terization of subduction zone seismic sources includes consideration of the three-dimensional geometry of the subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction zones, geometry of historical ruptures, constraints on the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and compar isons with other subduction zones worldwide.
 
The Basin and Range region of the Western United States, and to a lesser extent the Pacific North west and the Central United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes. Temporal clustering is best exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah and the Meers fault in cen tral Oklahoma, where several large late Holocene co seismic faulting events occurred at relatively close intervals (hundreds to thousands of years) that were preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted thousands to tens of thousand years. Temporal clus tering should be considered in these regions or wher ever paleoseismic evidence indicates that it has oc curred.


==C. REGULATORY POSITION==
==C. REGULATORY POSITION==
The active plate-margin region includes, for exam
1. GEOLOGICAL, GEOPHYSICAL,  
                                                                  1. GEOLOGICAL, GEOPHYSICAL,
SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOTECHNICAL  
    ple, coastal California, Oregon, Washington, and Alas SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOTECHNICAL
INVESTIGATIONS  
    ka. For the active plate-margin region, where earth                INVESTIGATIONS
1.1 Comprehensive geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations of the site and regions around the site should be performed.
    quakes can often be correlated with known tectonic structures, those structures should be assessed for their          1.1 Comprehensive geological, seismological, earthquake and surface deformation potential. In this        geophysical, and geotechnical investigations of the region, at least three types of sources exist: (1) faults    site and regions around the site should be performed.


1.165-3
1.165-3


For existing nuclear power plant sites where addi                   acterize the seismic and surface deformation tional units are planned, the geosciences technical in               potential of any capable tectonic sources and formation originally used to validate those sites may,               the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or be inadequate, depending on how much new or addi                     to demonstrate that such structures are not pres tional information has become available since the ini               ent. Sites with capable tectonic or seismogenic tial investigations and analyses were performed, the                 sources within a radius of 40 km (25 miles) may quality of the investigations performed at the time,                 require more extensive geological and seismo and the complexity of the site and regional geology                 logical investigations and analyses (similar in and seismology. This technical information should                   detail to investigations and analysis usually be utilized along with all other available information               preferred within an 8-km (5-mile) radius).
For existing nuclear power plant sites where addi tional units are planned, the geosciences technical in formation originally used to validate those sites may, be inadequate, depending on how much new or addi tional information has become available since the ini tial investigations and analyses were performed, the quality of the investigations performed at the time, and the complexity of the site and regional geology and seismology. This technical information should be utilized along with all other available information to plan and determine the scope of additional inves tigations. The investigations described in this regula tory guide are performed primarily to gather informa tion needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to gather data pertinent to the safe design and construc tion of the nuclear power plant. Appropriate geologi cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations are described in Appendix D to this guide. Geotech nical investigations are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 8). Another important purpose for the site-specific investigations is to de termine whether there are new data or interpretations that are not adequately incorporated in the existing PSHA data bases. Appendix E describes a method for evaluating new information derived from the site specific investigations in the context of the PSHA.
to plan and determine the scope of additional inves tigations. The investigations described in this regula       3.    Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, tory guide are performed primarily to gather informa                 and geotechnical investigations should be con tion needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to           ducted within a radius of 8 km (5 miles) of the gather data pertinent to the safe design and construc               site, as appropriate, to evaluate the potential for tion of the nuclear power plant. Appropriate geologi                 tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations                   and to assess the ground motion transmission are described in Appendix D to this guide. Geotech                   characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicin nical investigations are described in Regulatory                     ity. Investigations should include monitoring by Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of                 a network of seismic stations.


Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 8). Another important
These investigations should be performed at four levels, with the degree of their detail based on distance from the site, the nature of the Quaternary tectonic regime, the geological complexity of the site and re gion, the existence of potential seismic sources, the po tential for surface deformations, etc. A more detailed discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and the bases for them is presented in Appendix D to this regulatory guide. The levels of investigation are char acterized as follows.
                                                              4.    Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geo purpose for the site-specific investigations is to de technical engineering investigations should be termine whether there are new data or interpretations conducted within the site [radius of approximate that are not adequately incorporated in the existing PSHA data bases. Appendix E describes a method for                   ly 1 km (0.5 miles)] to assess specific soil and evaluating new information derived from the site                    rock characteristics as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 8).
specific investigations in the context of the PSHA.


1.2 The areas of investigations may be expanded These investigations should be performed at four        beyond those specified above in regions that include ca levels, with the degree of their detail based on distance    pable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or from the site, the nature of the Quaternary tectonic complex geology, or in regions that have experienced a regime, the geological complexity of the site and re large, geologically recent earthquake.
1.


gion, the existence of potential seismic sources, the po tential for surface deformations, etc. A more detailed            1.3 It should be demonstrated that deformation discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and      features discovered during construction, particularly the bases for them is presented in Appendix D to this        faults, do not have the potential to compromise the regulatory guide. The levels of investigation are char        safety of the plant. The two-step licensing practice, acterized as follows.                                        which required applicants to acquire a Construction Permit (CP), and then during construction apply for
Regional geological and seismological inves tigations are not expected to be extensive nor in great detail, but should include literature re views, the study of maps and remote sensing data, and, if necessary, ground truth reconnais sances conducted within a radius of 320 km  
1.    Regional geological and seismological inves           an Operating License (OL), has been modified to al tigations are not expected to be extensive nor in     low for an alternative procedure. The requirements great detail, but should include literature re         and procedures applicable to NRC's issuance of com views, the study of maps and remote sensing           bined licenses for nuclear power facilities are in Sub data, and, if necessary, ground truth reconnais       part C of 10 CFR Part 52. Applying the combined li sances conducted within a radius of 320 km             censing procedure to a site could result in the award of
(200 miles) of the site to identify seismic.
      (200 miles) of the site to identify seismic.           a license prior to the start of construction. During the sources (seismogenic and capable tectonic              construction of nuclear power plants licensed in the sources).                                              past two decades, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavation


====s. Before issuance====
sources (seismogenic and capable tectonic sources).
2.    Geological, seismological, and geophysical in          of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that the;
2.
      vestigations should be carried out within a ra        faults in the excavation posed no hazard to the facili dius of 40 km (25 miles) in greater detail than        ty. Under the combined license procedure, these the regional investigations to identify and char-      kinds of features should be mapped and assessed as to
                                                      1.165-4


their rupture and ground motion generating potential          characterization of seismic sources should be ad while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.          dressed as appropriate. Seismic source is a general term Therefore, a commitment should be made, in docu              referring to both seismogenic sources and capable tec ments (Safety Analysis Reports) supporting the li            tonic sources. The main distinction between these two cense application, to geologically map all excava            types of seismic sources is that a seismogenic source tions and to notify the NRC staff when excavations            would not cause surface displacement, but a capable are open for inspection.                                      tectonic source causes surface or near-surface displace ment.
Geological, seismological, and geophysical in vestigations should be carried out within a ra dius of 40 km (25 miles) in greater detail than the regional investigations to identify and char- acterize the seismic and surface deformation potential of any capable tectonic sources and the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or to demonstrate that such structures are not pres ent. Sites with capable tectonic or seismogenic sources within a radius of 40 km (25 miles) may require more extensive geological and seismo logical investigations and analyses (similar in detail to investigations and analysis usually preferred within an 8-km (5-mile) radius). 
3.


1.4 Data sufficient to clearly justify all conclu sions should be presented. Because engineering solu                Identification and characterization of seismic tions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for        sources should be based on regional and site geological the effects of permanent ground displacement, it is pru        and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seis dent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or     micity data, the regional stress field, and geological ev near-surface deformation. Such sites normally will re          idence of prehistoric earthquakes. Investigations to quire extensive additional investigations.                    identify seismic sources are described in Appendix D.
Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations should be con ducted within a radius of 8 km (5 miles) of the site, as appropriate, to evaluate the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface and to assess the ground motion transmission characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicin ity. Investigations should include monitoring by a network of seismic stations.


The bases for the identification of seismic sources
4.
    1.5 For the site and for the area surrounding the should be documented. A general list of characteristics site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, and to be evaluated for a seismic source is presented in Ap structural geologic conditions should be character pendix D.


ized. The investigations should include the measure ment of the static and dynamic engineering proper                S2.3 - As part of the seismic source pharacteriza ties of the materials underlying the site and an              tion, the seismic potential for each source should be evaluation of physical evidence concerning the be              evaluated. Typically, characterization of the seismic havior during prior earthquakes of the surficial mate        potential consists of four equally important elements:
Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geo technical engineering investigations should be conducted within the site [radius of approximate ly 1 km (0.5 miles)] to assess specific soil and rock characteristics as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 8). 
rials and the substrata underlying the site. The prop erties needed to assess the behavior of the underlying        1.   Selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source.
1.2 The areas of investigations may be expanded beyond those specified above in regions that include ca pable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or complex geology, or in regions that have experienced a large, geologically recent earthquake.


material during earthquakes, including the potential for liquefaction, and the characteristics of the under        2.   Selection of a model for the temporal distribution lying material in transmitting earthquake ground mo                  of earthquakes in a source.
1.3 It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction, particularly faults, do not have the potential to compromise the safety of the plant. The two-step licensing practice, which required applicants to acquire a Construction Permit (CP), and then during construction apply for an Operating License (OL), has been modified to al low for an alternative procedure. The requirements and procedures applicable to NRC's issuance of com bined licenses for nuclear power facilities are in Sub part C of 10 CFR Part 52. Applying the combined li censing procedure to a site could result in the award of a license prior to the start of construction. During the construction of nuclear power plants licensed in the past two decades, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavations. Before issuance of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that the;
faults in the excavation posed no hazard to the facili ty. Under the combined license procedure, these kinds of features should be mapped and assessed as to
1.165-4


tions to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity,            3.    Selection of a model for the relative frequency of elastic moduli, and strength) should be measured.                    earthquakes of various magnitudes, including an
their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.
2. SEISMIC SOURCES SIGNIFICANT TO                                    estimate for the largest earthquake that could oc cur in the source under the current tectonic THE SITE SEISMIC HAZARD                                        regime.


2.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the EPRI or LLNL PSHA methodologies and data bases are used to           4.    A complete description of the uncertainty.
Therefore, a commitment should be made, in docu ments (Safety Analysis Reports) supporting the li cense application, to geologically map all excava tions and to notify the NRC staff when excavations are open for inspection.


determine the SSE, it still may be necessary to investi            For example, in the LLNL study a truncated expo gate and characterize potential seismic sources that          nential model was used for the distribution of magni were previously unknown or uncharacterized and to            tudes given that an earthquake has occurred in a source.
1.4 Data sufficient to clearly justify all conclu sions should be presented. Because engineering solu tions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for the effects of permanent ground displacement, it is pru dent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or near-surface deformation. Such sites normally will re quire extensive additional investigations.


perform sensitivity analyses to assess their significance    A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spa to the seismic hazard estimate. The results of investiga      tial and temporal occurrences of earthquakes in a tions discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be           source.
1.5 For the site and for the area surrounding the site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, and structural geologic conditions should be character ized. The investigations should include the measure ment of the static and dynamic engineering proper ties of the materials underlying the site and an evaluation of physical evidence concerning the be havior during prior earthquakes of the surficial mate rials and the substrata underlying the site. The prop erties needed to assess the behavior of the underlying material during earthquakes, including the potential for liquefaction, and the characteristics of the under lying material in transmitting earthquake ground mo tions to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity, elastic moduli, and strength) should be measured.


used, in accordance with Appendix E, to determine                 For a general discussion of evaluating the earth whether the LLNL or EPRI seismic sources and their           quake potential and characterizing the uncertainty, re characterization should be updated. The guidance in           fer to the Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 below and in Appen           Report (Ref. 9).
2. SEISMIC SOURCES SIGNIFICANT TO
dix D of this guide may be used if additional seismic             2.3.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the LLNL or sources are to be developed as a result of investigations.
THE SITE SEISMIC HAZARD
2.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the EPRI or LLNL PSHA methodologies and data bases are used to determine the SSE, it still may be necessary to investi gate and characterize potential seismic sources that were previously unknown or uncharacterized and to perform sensitivity analyses to assess their significance to the seismic hazard estimate. The results of investiga tions discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be used, in accordance with Appendix E, to determine whether the LLNL or EPRI seismic sources and their characterization should be updated. The guidance in Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 below and in Appen dix D of this guide may be used if additional seismic sources are to be developed as a result of investigations.


EPRI method is not used or not applicable (such as in
2.2 When the LLNL and EPRI methods are not used or are not applicable, the guidance in Regulatory Position 2.3 should be used for identification and char acterization of seismic sources. The uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources should be ad dressed as appropriate. Seismic source is a general term referring to both seismogenic sources and capable tec tonic sources. The main distinction between these two types of seismic sources is that a seismogenic source would not cause surface displacement, but a capable tectonic source causes surface or near-surface displace ment.
    2.2 When the LLNL and EPRI methods are not               the New Madrid Seismic Zone), it is necessary to evalu used or are not applicable, the guidance in Regulatory       ate the seismic potential for each source. The seismic Position 2.3 should be used for identification and char       sources and data that have been accepted by the NRC in acterization of seismic sources. The uncertainties in the     past licensing decisions may be used, along with the
                                                      1.165-5


data gathered from the investigations carried out as de        "*    Surface rupture length versus magnitude (Refs.
Identification and characterization of seismic sources should be based on regional and site geological and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seis micity data, the regional stress field, and geological ev idence of prehistoric earthquakes. Investigations to identify seismic sources are described in Appendix D.


scribed in Regulatory Position 1.                                      10-13),
The bases for the identification of seismic sources should be documented. A general list of characteristics to be evaluated for a seismic source is presented in Ap pendix D.
                                                                "*    Subsurface rupture length versus magnitude Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are                  (Ref. 14),                                            .-
area sources because there is uncertainty about the
                                                                "*    Rupture area versus magnitude (Ref. 15),
underlying causes of earthquakes. This uncertainty is due to a lack of active surface faulting, a low rate of        "*    Maximum and average displacement versus seismic activity, and a short historical record. The as                magnitude (Ref. 14),
sessment of earthquake recurrence for CEUS area                "*    Slip rate versus magnitude (Ref. 16).
sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of ob When such correlations as References 10-16 are served seismicity. Because these catalogs are incom used, the earthquake potential is often evaluated as the plete and cover a relatively short period of time, it is mean of the distribution. The difficult issue is the evalu difficult to obtain reliable estimates of the rate of ac ation of the appropriate rupture dimension to be used.


tivity. Considerable care must be taken to correct for This is a judgmental process based on geological data incompleteness and to model the uncertainty in the for the fault in question and the behavior of other re rate of earthquake recurrence. To completely charac gional fault systems of the same type.
S2.3 -As part of the seismic source pharacteriza tion, the seismic potential for each source should be evaluated. Typically, characterization of the seismic potential consists of four equally important elements:
1.


terize the seismic potential for a source it is also nec essary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude                  The other elements of the. recurrence model are that a seismic source is capable of generating under            generally obtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault the current tectonic regime. This estimated magni              slip rate, and other data. In some cases, it may be ap tude defines the upper bound of the earthquake recur            propriate to use recurrence models with memory. All rence relationship.                                            the sources of uncertainty must be appropriately mod eled. Additionally, the phenomenon of temporal clus The assessment of earthquake potential for area            tering should be considered when there is geological sources is particularly difficult because the physical          evidence of its past occurrence.
Selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source.


constraint most important to the assessment, the di                  2.3.3 For sites near subduction zones, such as in mensions of the fault rupture, is not known, As a re            the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximum mag sult, the primary methods for assessing maximum                nitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic earthquakes for area sources usually include a con              sources. Worldwide observations indicate that the larg sideration of the historical seismicity record, the pat        est known earthquakes are associated with the plate in tern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary (2            terface, although intraslab earthquakes may also have million years and younger), characteristics of the              large magnitudes. The assessment of plate interface source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns            earthquakes can be based on estimates of the expected with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data,            dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction and analogues to sources in other regions considered            zones worldwide.
2.


tectonically similar to the CEUS. Because of the shortness of the historical catalog and low rate of            3. PROBABILISTIC SEISMIC HAZARD
Selection of a model for the temporal distribution of earthquakes in a source.
seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed. It                ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
is important to characterize the large uncertainties in              A PSHA should be performed for the site as it al the assessment of the earthquake potential.                    lows the use of multiple models to estimate the likeli hood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site,
    2.3.2 For sites located within the Western United          and a PSHA systematically takes into account uncer States, earthquakes can often be associated with known          tainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic tectonic structures. For faults, the earthquake potential      sources, maximum 'earthquakes,.              and ground is related to the characteristics of the estimated future      motion attenuation).    Alternative hypotheses    areý con rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the    sidered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA. Alterna amount      fault displacement. The following empirical        tive hypotheses can also be used to evaluate the sensi relationsofcan be used to estimate the earthquake poten        tivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant tial from fault behavior data and also to estimate the          parameters and to identify the relative contribution of amount of displacement that might be expected for a             each seismic source to the hazard. Reference 9 provides given magnitude. It is prudent to use several of these          guidance for conducting a PSHA.


different relations to obtain an estimate of the earth              The following steps describe a procedure that is ac quake magnitude.                                               ceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA. The
3.
                                                        1.165-6


details of the calculational aspects of deriving control            critically damped median spectral ground mo ling earthquakes from the PSHA are included in Ap                  tion levels for the average of 5 and 10 Hz, pendix C.                                                          Sa-,510, and for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, Sa,1.2.5. Appendix B discusses situations in
Selection of a model for the relative frequency of earthquakes of various magnitudes, including an estimate for the largest earthquake that could oc cur in the source under the current tectonic regime.
/ 1.    Perform regional and site geological, seismologi              which an alternative reference probability may cal, and geophysical investigations in accordance            be more appropriate. The alternative reference with Regulatory Position I and Appendix D.                    probability is reviewed and accepted on a case by-case basis. Appendix B also describes a pro
  2.    For CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of                      cedure that should be used when a general revi LLNL or EPRI seismic sources in accordance                    sion to the reference probability is needed.


with Appendix E to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered        5.    Deaggregate the median probabilistic hazard in Step 1 or require updating. The PSHAshould                characterization in accordance with Appendix C
4.
        only be updated if the new information indi                  to determine the controlling earthquakes (i.e.,
        cates that the current version significantly un              magnitudes and distances). Document the hazard derestimates the hazard and there is a strong                information base as discussed in Appendix C.


technical basis that supports such a revision. It
A complete description of the uncertainty.
                                                                4. PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING THE
        may be possible to justify a lower hazard esti SSE
        mate with an exceptionally strong technical ba sis. However, it is expected that large uncertain          After completing the PSHA (See Regulatory Posi ties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS          tion 3) and determining the controlling earthquakes, the will continue to exist in the future, and substan      following procedure should be used to determine the tial delays in the licensing process will result in    SSE. Appendix F contains an additional discussion of trying to justify a lower value with respect to a      some of the characteristics of the SSE.


specific site. For these reasons the NRC staff          1.    With the controlling earthquakes determined as discourages efforts to justify a lower hazard es              described in Regulatory Position 3 and by using timate. In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity              the procedures in Revision 3 of Standard Re studies should be sufficient to demonstrate that              view Plan (SRP) Section 2.5.2 (which may in the existing data base in the PSHA envelops the              clude the use of ground motion models not in findings from site-specific investigations. In                cluded in the PSHA but that are more general, significant revisions to the LLNL and                appropriate for the source, region, and site un EPRI data base are to be undertaken only peri                der consideration or that represent the latest odically (every 10 years), or when there is an               scientific development), develop 5% of critical important new finding or occurrence. An over                  damping response spectral shapes for the actual all revision of the data base would also require a           or assumed rock conditions. The same control reexamination of the acceptability of the refer              ling earthquakes are also used to derive vertical ence probability discussed in Appendix B and                  response spectral shapes.
For example, in the LLNL study a truncated expo nential model was used for the distribution of magni tudes given that an earthquake has occurred in a source.


used in Step 4 below. Any significant update should follow the guidance of Reference 9.              2.    Use Sa,5-10 to scale the response spectrum shape corresponding to the controlling earthquake. If,
A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spa tial and temporal occurrences of earthquakes in a source.
  3.    For CEUS sites only, perform the LLNL or                      as described in Appendix C, there is a control EPRI probabilistic seismic hazard analysis us                ling earthquake for Sa,1-2.5, determine that the ing original or updated sources as determined in              Sa,5-10 scaled response spectrum also envelopes Step 2. For sites in other parts of the country,              the ground motion spectrum for the controlling perform a site-specific PSHA (Reference 9).                  earthquake for Sa,1-2.5. Otherwise, modify the The ground motion estimates should be made                    shape to envelope the low-frequency spectrum for rock conditions in the free-field or by as                or use two spectra in the following steps. See suming hypothetical rock conditions for a non                additional discussion in Appendix F. For a rock rock site to develop the seismic hazard informa              site go to Step 4.


tion base discussed in Appendix C.
For a general discussion of evaluating the earth quake potential and characterizing the uncertainty, re fer to the Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee Report (Ref. 9). 
2.3.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the LLNL or EPRI method is not used or not applicable (such as in the New Madrid Seismic Zone), it is necessary to evalu ate the seismic potential for each source. The seismic sources and data that have been accepted by the NRC in past licensing decisions may be used, along with the
1.165-5


3.    For nonrock sites, perform a site-specific soil am
data gathered from the investigations carried out as de scribed in Regulatory Position 1.
  4.    Using the reference probability (1E-5 per year)              plification analysis considering uncertainties in described in Appendix B, determine the 5% of                  site-specific geotechnical properties and parame
                                                            65-7


ters to determine response spectra at the free              Additional discussion of this step is provided in ground surface in the freefield for the actual site    Appendix F.
Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are area sources because there is uncertainty about the underlying causes of earthquakes. This uncertainty is due to a lack of active surface faulting, a low rate of seismic activity, and a short historical record. The as sessment of earthquake recurrence for CEUS area sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of ob served seismicity. Because these catalogs are incom plete and cover a relatively short period of time, it is difficult to obtain reliable estimates of the rate of ac tivity. Considerable care must be taken to correct for incompleteness and to model the uncertainty in the rate of earthquake recurrence. To completely charac terize the seismic potential for a source it is also nec essary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude that a seismic source is capable of generating under the current tectonic regime. This estimated magni tude defines the upper bound of the earthquake recur rence relationship.


conditions.
The assessment of earthquake potential for area sources is particularly difficult because the physical constraint most important to the assessment, the di mensions of the fault rupture, is not known, As a re sult, the primary methods for assessing maximum earthquakes for area sources usually include a con sideration of the historical seismicity record, the pat tern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary (2 million years and younger), characteristics of the source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data, and analogues to sources in other regions considered tectonically similar to the CEUS. Because of the shortness of the historical catalog and low rate of seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed. It is important to characterize the large uncertainties in the assessment of the earthquake potential.
 
2.3.2 For sites located within the Western United States, earthquakes can often be associated with known tectonic structures. For faults, the earthquake potential is related to the characteristics of the estimated future rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the amount of fault displacement. The following empirical relations can be used to estimate the earthquake poten tial from fault behavior data and also to estimate the amount of displacement that might be expected for a given magnitude. It is prudent to use several of these different relations to obtain an estimate of the earth quake magnitude.
 
"*
Surface rupture length versus magnitude (Refs.
 
10-13),
"*
Subsurface rupture length versus magnitude (Ref. 14),
"*
Rupture area versus magnitude (Ref. 15),
"*
Maximum and average displacement versus magnitude (Ref. 14),
"*
Slip rate versus magnitude (Ref. 16). 
When such correlations as References 10-16 are used, the earthquake potential is often evaluated as the mean of the distribution. The difficult issue is the evalu ation of the appropriate rupture dimension to be used.
 
This is a judgmental process based on geological data for the fault in question and the behavior of other re gional fault systems of the same type.
 
The other elements of the. recurrence model are generally obtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault slip rate, and other data. In some cases, it may be ap propriate to use recurrence models with memory. All the sources of uncertainty must be appropriately mod eled. Additionally, the phenomenon of temporal clus tering should be considered when there is geological evidence of its past occurrence.
 
2.3.3 For sites near subduction zones, such as in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximum mag nitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic sources. Worldwide observations indicate that the larg est known earthquakes are associated with the plate in terface, although intraslab earthquakes may also have large magnitudes. The assessment of plate interface earthquakes can be based on estimates of the expected dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction zones worldwide.
 
3. PROBABILISTIC SEISMIC HAZARD
ANALYSIS PROCEDURES
A PSHA should be performed for the site as it al lows the use of multiple models to estimate the likeli hood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site, and a PSHA systematically takes into account uncer tainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic sources, maximum 'earthquakes,.
and ground motion attenuation). Alternative hypotheses areý con sidered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA. Alterna tive hypotheses can also be used to evaluate the sensi tivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant parameters and to identify the relative contribution of each seismic source to the hazard. Reference 9 provides guidance for conducting a PSHA.
 
The following steps describe a procedure that is ac ceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA. The
1.165-6
.-
 
details of the calculational aspects of deriving control ling earthquakes from the PSHA are included in Ap pendix C.
 
/
1.
 
Perform regional and site geological, seismologi cal, and geophysical investigations in accordance with Regulatory Position I and Appendix D.
 
2.
 
For CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of LLNL or EPRI seismic sources in accordance with Appendix E to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered in Step 1 or require updating. The PSHAshould only be updated if the new information indi cates that the current version significantly un derestimates the hazard and there is a strong technical basis that supports such a revision. It may be possible to justify a lower hazard esti mate with an exceptionally strong technical ba sis. However, it is expected that large uncertain ties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS
will continue to exist in the future, and substan tial delays in the licensing process will result in trying to justify a lower value with respect to a specific site. For these reasons the NRC staff discourages efforts to justify a lower hazard es timate. In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity studies should be sufficient to demonstrate that the existing data base in the PSHA envelops the findings from site-specific investigations. In general, significant revisions to the LLNL and EPRI data base are to be undertaken only peri odically (every 10 years), or when there is an important new finding or occurrence. An over all revision of the data base would also require a reexamination of the acceptability of the refer ence probability discussed in Appendix B and used in Step 4 below. Any significant update should follow the guidance of Reference 9.
 
3.
 
For CEUS sites only, perform the LLNL or EPRI probabilistic seismic hazard analysis us ing original or updated sources as determined in Step 2. For sites in other parts of the country, perform a site-specific PSHA (Reference 9). 
The ground motion estimates should be made for rock conditions in the free-field or by as suming hypothetical rock conditions for a non rock site to develop the seismic hazard informa tion base discussed in Appendix C.
 
4.
 
Using the reference probability (1E-5 per year)
described in Appendix B, determine the 5% of critically damped median spectral ground mo tion levels for the average of 5 and 10 Hz, Sa-,510, and for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, Sa,1.2.5. Appendix B discusses situations in which an alternative reference probability may be more appropriate. The alternative reference probability is reviewed and accepted on a case by-case basis. Appendix B also describes a pro cedure that should be used when a general revi sion to the reference probability is needed.
 
5.
 
Deaggregate the median probabilistic hazard characterization in accordance with Appendix C
to determine the controlling earthquakes (i.e.,
magnitudes and distances). Document the hazard information base as discussed in Appendix C.
 
4. PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING THE
SSE
After completing the PSHA (See Regulatory Posi tion 3) and determining the controlling earthquakes, the following procedure should be used to determine the SSE. Appendix F contains an additional discussion of some of the characteristics of the SSE.
 
1.
 
With the controlling earthquakes determined as described in Regulatory Position 3 and by using the procedures in Revision 3 of Standard Re view Plan (SRP) Section 2.5.2 (which may in clude the use of ground motion models not in cluded in the PSHA but that are more appropriate for the source, region, and site un der consideration or that represent the latest scientific development), develop 5% of critical damping response spectral shapes for the actual or assumed rock conditions. The same control ling earthquakes are also used to derive vertical response spectral shapes.
 
2.
 
Use Sa,5-10 to scale the response spectrum shape corresponding to the controlling earthquake. If, as described in Appendix C, there is a control ling earthquake for Sa,1-2.5, determine that the Sa,5-10 scaled response spectrum also envelopes the ground motion spectrum for the controlling earthquake for Sa,1-2.5. Otherwise, modify the shape to envelope the low-frequency spectrum or use two spectra in the following steps. See additional discussion in Appendix F. For a rock site go to Step 4.
 
3.
 
For nonrock sites, perform a site-specific soil am plification analysis considering uncertainties in site-specific geotechnical properties and parame
65-7
 
ters to determine response spectra at the free ground surface in the freefield for the actual site conditions.
 
4.
 
Compare the smooth SSE spectrum or spectra used in design (e.g., 0.3g, broad-band spectra used in advanced light-water reactor designs)
with the spectrum or spectra determined in Step 2 for rock sites or determined in Step 3 for the non rock sites to assess the adequacy of the SSE spec trum or spectra.
 
To obtain an adequate design SSE based on the site-specific response spectrum or spectra, develop a smooth spectrum or spectra or use a standard broad band shape that envelopes the spectra of Step 2 or Step 3.
 
Additional discussion of this step is provided in Appendix F.


==D. IMPLEMENTATION==
==D. IMPLEMENTATION==
4.    Compare the smooth SSE spectrum or spectra                The purpose of this section is to provide guidance to applicants and licensees regarding the NRC staff's used in design (e.g., 0.3g, broad-band spectra plans for using this regulatory guide.
The purpose of this section is to provide guidance to applicants and licensees regarding the NRC staff's plans for using this regulatory guide.


used in advanced light-water reactor designs)
Except in those cases in which the applicant pro poses an acceptable alternative method for comply ing with the specified portions of the Commission's regulations, this guide will be used in the evaluation of applications for construction permits, operating li censes, early site permits, or combined licenses sub mitted after January 10, 1997. This guide will not be used in the evaluation of an application for an operat ing license submitted after January 10, 1997, if the construction permit was issued prior to that date.
      with the spectrum or spectra determined in Step 2          Except in those cases in which the applicant pro for rock sites or determined in Step 3 for the non      poses an acceptable alternative method for comply rock sites to assess the adequacy of the SSE spec      ing with the specified portions of the Commission's trum or spectra.                                        regulations, this guide will be used in the evaluation of applications for construction permits, operating li To obtain an adequate design SSE based on the            censes, early site permits, or combined licenses sub site-specific response spectrum or spectra, develop a        mitted after January 10, 1997. This guide will not be smooth spectrum or spectra or use a standard broad            used in the evaluation of an application for an operat band shape that envelopes the spectra of Step 2 or            ing license submitted after January 10, 1997, if the Step 3.                                                      construction permit was issued prior to that date.


1.165-8
1.165-8


REFERENCES
REFERENCES
    S1. Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of                          8.      USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Program;                                       Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.132.3 Diablo Canyon Power Plant18Doc8.t Nos. 50-275
S1. Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Program;  
                                                                                    9.      Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee and 50-323, 198PD1 (SSHAC), "Recommendations for Probabilistic
Diablo Canyon Power Plant18 Doc8.t Nos. 50-275 and 50-323, 198PD1  
  2.     R- Rood et aL, "Safety Evaluation Report Related to                               Seismic Hazard Analysis: Guidance on Uncer the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power                                       tainty and Use of Experts," Lawrence Livermore Plant, Units 1 and V" NUREG-0675, Supplement                                       National Laboratory, UCRL-ID-122160, Au No. 34, USNRC, June 1991.2                                                         gust 1995 (to be published as NUREG/CR
2.
                                                                                              6372).
 
  3.      Letter from G. Sorensen, Washington Public Power Supply System, to Document Control                                 10.      D.B. Slemmons, "Faults and Earthquake Magni Branch, USNRC. Subject: Nuclear Project No. 3,                                     tude," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Water Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response;                                     ways Experiment Station, Misc. Papers S-73-1, February 29, 1988.1                                                                Report 6, 1977.
R- Rood et aL, "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and V" NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, USNRC, June 1991.2  
3.
 
Letter from G. Sorensen, Washington Public Power Supply System, to Document Control Branch, USNRC. Subject: Nuclear Project No. 3, Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response;  
February 29, 1988.1
4.
 
D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Vol umes 1-8, January 1989.2
5.
 
P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"
NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.2
2
6.
 
J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Character ization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Liv ermore National Laboratory, June 1993.1 (Accession number 9310190318 in NRC's Public Document Room)
7.
 
Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.
 
lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail ing address is Mail Stop LEA Washington, DC 20555; telephone
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


4.      D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac                            11.      D.B. Slemmons, "Determination of Design terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the                                   Earthquake Magnitudes for Microzonation,"
2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail ing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
          Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Vol                                              Proceedings of the Third InternationalMicro umes 1-8, January 1989.2                                                          zonation Conference, University of Washington, Seattle, Volume 1, pp. 119-130, 1982.
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, PRO Box 37082, Washington, DC
20402-9328(telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical In formation Service by writing NMIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA
22161.


5.       P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant                              12.     M.G. Bonilla, H.A. Villalobos, and R.E. Wallace, Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"                                              "Exploratory Trench Across the Pleasant Valley NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.2                                                  Fault, Nevada," Professional Paper 1274-B, U.S.
8.
 
USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.132.3
9.
 
Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee (SSHAC), "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis: Guidance on Uncer tainty and Use of Experts," Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, UCRL-ID-122160, Au gust 1995 (to be published as NUREG/CR
6372). 
10.
 
D.B. Slemmons, "Faults and Earthquake Magni tude," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Water ways Experiment Station, Misc. Papers S-73-1, Report 6, 1977.
 
11.
 
D.B. Slemmons, "Determination of Design Earthquake Magnitudes for Microzonation,"
Proceedings of the Third International Micro zonation Conference, University of Washington, Seattle, Volume 1, pp. 119-130, 1982.
 
12.
 
M.G. Bonilla, H.A. Villalobos, and R.E. Wallace,  
"Exploratory Trench Across the Pleasant Valley Fault, Nevada," Professional Paper 1274-B, U.S.


Geological Survey, pp. B1-B14, 1984.1
Geological Survey, pp. B1-B14, 1984.1
2 6.       J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Character
13.
                                                                                    13.    S.G. Wesnousky, "Relationship Between Total ization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Liv Affect, Degree of Fault Trace Complexity, and ermore National Laboratory, June 1993.1 (Accession Earthquake Size on Major Strike-Slip Faults in number 9310190318 in NRC's Public Document California" (Abs), Seismological Research Let-,
 
          Room)
S.G. Wesnousky, "Relationship Between Total Affect, Degree of Fault Trace Complexity, and Earthquake Size on Major Strike-Slip Faults in California" (Abs), Seismological Research Let-,  
                                                                                            ters, Volume 59, No. 1, p. 3, 1988.
ters, Volume 59, No. 1, p. 3, 1988.
 
14.


7.      Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic                        14.    D.L Wells and K.J. Coppersmith, 'New Empirical Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power                                      Relationships Among Magnitude, Rupture Length, Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United                                    Rupture Width, Rupture Area, and Surface Displace States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.                                        men," Bulletn of the Seismological Sociy of America, Volume 84, August 1994.
D.L Wells and K.J. Coppersmith, 'New Empirical Relationships Among Magnitude, Rupture Length, Rupture Width, Rupture Area, and Surface Displace men," Bulletn of the Seismological Sociy of America, Volume 84, August 1994.


15.    M. Wyss, "Estimating Maximum Expectable Mag nitude of Earthquakes from Fault Dimensions,"
15.
                                                                                            Geology, Volume 7 (7), pp. 336-340, 1979.


16.     D.P. Schwartz and KJ. Coppersmith, "Seismic Hazards: New Trends in Analysis Using Geolog lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public              ic Data," Active Tectonics, National Academy Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail ing address is Mail Stop LEA Washington, DC 20555; telephone                            Press, Washington, DC, pp. 215-230, 1986.
M. Wyss, "Estimating Maximum Expectable Mag nitude of Earthquakes from Fault Dimensions,"  
Geology, Volume 7 (7), pp. 336-340, 1979.


(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
16.
 
D.P. Schwartz and KJ. Coppersmith, "Seismic Hazards: New Trends in Analysis Using Geolog ic Data," Active Tectonics, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, pp. 215-230, 1986.


2 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public    3 Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail                Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be obtained ing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone                    free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Altn: Distribution
3Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be obtained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Altn: Distribution and Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at  
    (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates        and Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at from the U.S. Government Printing Office, PRO Box 37082, Washington, DC          (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee
(301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-., Washington, DC 20555;  
    20402-9328(telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical In            from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, formation Service by writing NMIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA        DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-., Washington, DC 20555;
telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
    22161.                                                                            telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


1.165-9
1.165-9


APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A  
                                                    DEFINITIONS
DEFINITIONS
Controlling Earthquakes - Controlling earthquakes             is the use of a truncated exponential model for the mag K
Controlling Earthquakes -
are the earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or       nitude distribution and a stationary Poisson process for to estimate ground motions at the site. There may be           the temporal and spatial occurrence of earthquakes.
Controlling earthquakes are the earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or to estimate ground motions at the site. There may be several controlling earthquakes for a site. As a result of the probabalistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), con trolling earthquakes are characterized as mean magni tudes and distances derived from a deaggregation anal ysis of the median estimate of the PSHA.
 
Earthquake Recurrence -
Earthquake recurrence is the frequency of occurrence of earthquakes having vari ous magnitudes. Recurrence relationships or curves are developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the frequency of occurrence (usually expressed on an annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, in cluding measures of uncertainty.
 
Intensity -
The intensity of an earthquake is a meas ure of vibratory ground motion effects on humans, on human-built structures, and on the earth's surface at a particular location. Intensity is described by a numeri cal value on the Modified Mercalli scale.
 
Magnitude -
An earthquake's magnitude is a meas ure of the strength of the earthquake as determined from seismographic observations.
 
Maximum Magnitude -The maximum magnitude is the upper bound to recurrence curves.
 
Nontectonic Deformation -
Nontectonic deforma tion is distortion of surface or near-surface soils or rocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity.
 
Such deformation includes features associated with subsidence, karst terrane, glaciation or deglaciation, and growth faulting.
 
Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE)
-Th/o/SSE
is the vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are de signed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to remain functional.


several controlling earthquakes for a site. As a result of    Seismic Source'- Seismic source is a general term re the probabalistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), con          ferring to both seismogenic sources and capable tecton trolling earthquakes are characterized as mean magni          ic sources.
The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizon tal and vertical free-field ground motion response spec tra at the free ground surface.


tudes and distances derived from a deaggregation anal ysis of the median estimate of the PSHA.                             Capable Tectonic Source      -    A capable tectonic Earthquake Recurrence - Earthquake recurrence is                    source is a tectonic structure that can generate both the frequency of occurrence of earthquakes having vari              vibratory ground motion and tectonic surface de ous magnitudes. Recurrence relationships or curves are              formation such as faulting or folding at or near the developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the              earth's surface in the present seismotectonic re frequency of occurrence (usually expressed on an                     gime. It is described by at least one of the following annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, in                    characteristics:
Seismic Potential -
cluding measures of uncertainty.                                     a. Presence. of surface or near-surfice deforma Intensity - The intensity of an earthquake is a meas                    tion of landforms or geologic deposits of a re ure of vibratory ground motion effects on humans, on                      curring nature within the last approximately human-built structures, and on the earth's surface at a                   500,000 years or at least once in the last particular location. Intensity is described by a numeri                  approximately 50,000 years.
A model giving a complete de scription of the future earthquake activity in a seismic source zone. The model includes a relation giving the frequency (rate) of earthquakes of any magnitude, an estimate of the largest earthquake that could occur un der the current tectonic regime, and a complete descrip tion of the uncertainty. A typical model used for PSHA
is the use of a truncated exponential model for the mag nitude distribution and a stationary Poisson process for the temporal and spatial occurrence of earthquakes.


cal value on the Modified Mercalli scale.
Seismic Source'- Seismic source is a general term re ferring to both seismogenic sources and capable tecton ic sources.


b. A reasonable association with one or more Magnitude - An earthquake's magnitude is a meas                          moderate to large earthquakes or sustained ure of the strength of the earthquake as determined from                  earthquake activity that are usually accompa seismographic observations.                                              nied by significant surface deformation.
Capable Tectonic Source -
A capable tectonic source is a tectonic structure that can generate both vibratory ground motion and tectonic surface de formation such as faulting or folding at or near the earth's surface in the present seismotectonic re gime. It is described by at least one of the following characteristics:
a. Presence. of surface or near-surfice deforma tion of landforms or geologic deposits of a re curring nature within the last approximately
500,000 years or at least once in the last approximately 50,000 years.


Maximum Magnitude -The maximum magnitude is c. A structural association with a capable tectonic the upper bound to recurrence curves.
b. A reasonable association with one or more moderate to large earthquakes or sustained earthquake activity that are usually accompa nied by significant surface deformation.


source having characteristics of either section Nontectonic Deformation - Nontectonic deforma                            a or b in this paragraph such that movement on tion is distortion of surface or near-surface soils or                    one could be reasonably expected to be accom rocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity.            panied by movement on the other.
c. A structural association with a capable tectonic source having characteristics of either section a or b in this paragraph such that movement on one could be reasonably expected to be accom panied by movement on the other.


Such deformation includes features associated with subsidence, karst terrane, glaciation or deglaciation,                  *In some cases, the geological evidence of past and growth faulting.                                                activity at or near the ground surface along a poten tial capable tectonic source may be obscured at a Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE)                        particular site. This might occur, for example, at a
* In some cases, the geological evidence of past activity at or near the ground surface along a poten tial capable tectonic source may be obscured at a particular site. This might occur, for example, at a site having a deep overburden. For these cases, evi dence may exist elsewhere along the structure from which an evaluation of its characteristics in the vi cinity of the site can be reasonably based. Such evi dence is to be used in determining whether the structure is a capable tectonic source within this definition.
-Th/o/SSE is the vibratory ground motion for which                  site having a deep overburden. For these cases, evi certain structures, systems, and components are de                  dence may exist elsewhere along the structure from signed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to                which an evaluation of its characteristics in the vi remain functional.                                                  cinity of the site can be reasonably based. Such evi The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizon            dence is to be used in determining whether the tal and vertical free-field ground motion response spec              structure is a capable tectonic source within this tra at the free ground surface.                                      definition.


Seismic Potential - A model giving a complete de                          Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the scription of the future earthquake activity in a seismic            association of a structure with geological structures source zone. The model includes a relation giving the                that are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of frequency (rate) of earthquakes of any magnitude, an                those found in the Central and Eastern regions of estimate of the largest earthquake that could occur un              the United States, in the absence of conflicting evi der the current tectonic regime, and a complete descrip              dence will demonstrate that the structure is not a ca tion of the uncertainty. A typical model used for PSHA              pable tectonic source within this definition.
Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the association of a structure with geological structures that are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of those found in the Central and Eastern regions of the United States, in the absence of conflicting evi dence will demonstrate that the structure is not a ca pable tectonic source within this definition.


1.165-10
1.165-10
K


Seismogenic Source - A seismogenic source is a         crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of portion of the earth that we assume has uniform        currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate earthquake potential (same expected maximum            margin processes. It exhibits no significant deforma earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct          tion associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic from the seismicity of the surrounding regions. A      (last 240 million years) orogenic belts. It excludes ma seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground      jor zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, vol motion but is assumed not to cause surface dis          canism, or suturing.
Seismogenic Source -
A seismogenic source is a portion of the earth that we assume has uniform earthquake potential (same expected maximum earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct from the seismicity of the surrounding regions. A
seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground motion but is assumed not to cause surface dis placement. Seismogenic sources cover a wide range of possibilities from a well-defined tectonic structure to simply a large region of diffuse seis micity (seismotectonic province) thought to be characterized by the same earthquake recurrence model. A seismogenic source is also characterized by its involvement in the current tectonic regime (the Quaternary, or approximately the last 2 million years). 
Stable Continental Region -A stable continental re gion (SCR) is composed of continental crust, including continental shelves, slopes, and attenuated continental crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate margin processes. It exhibits no significant deforma tion associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic (last 240 million years) orogenic belts. It excludes ma jor zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, vol canism, or suturing.


placement. Seismogenic sources cover a wide Stationary Poisson Process - A probabilistic model range of possibilities from a well-defined tectonic of the occurrence of an event over time (space) that is structure to simply a large region of diffuse seis characterized by (1) the occurrence of the event in small micity (seismotectonic province) thought to be intervals is constant over time (space), (2) the occur characterized by the same earthquake recurrence rence of two (or more) events in a small interval is neg model. A seismogenic source is also characterized ligible, and (3) the occurrence of the event in non-over by its involvement in the current tectonic regime (the Quaternary, or approximately the last 2 million    lapping intervals is independent..
Stationary Poisson Process -
    years).                                                Tectonic Structure - A tectonic structure is a large Stable Continental Region -A stable continental re          scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the gion (SCR) is composed of continental crust, including      earth's crust. Its 'extent may be on the order of tens of continental shelves, slopes, and attenuated continental    meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).
A probabilistic model of the occurrence of an event over time (space) that is characterized by (1) the occurrence of the event in small intervals is constant over time (space), (2) the occur rence of two (or more) events in a small interval is neg ligible, and (3) the occurrence of the event in non-over lapping intervals is independent..
                                                      1.165-11 I I       I 1 .
Tectonic Structure -
A tectonic structure is a large scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the earth's crust. Its 'extent may be on the order of tens of meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).
1.165-11 I  
I  
I  
1 .


APPENDIX B.
APPENDIX B.


REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE EXCEEDANCE LEVEL OF THE
REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE EXCEEDANCE LEVEL OF THE  
                                SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
                                                                                                                                          K
B.1 INTRODUCTION  
B.1 INTRODUCTION                                                             on the risk-based considerations; its application will This appendix describes the procedure that is ac                       also be reviewed on a case-by-case basis.
This appendix describes the procedure that is ac ceptable to the NRC staff to determine the reference probability, an annual probability of exceeding the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), at future nuclear power plant sites. The reference probability is used in Appendix C in conjunction with the probabilis tic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA). 
B.2 REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE
SSE
The reference probability is the annual probability level such that 50% of a set of currently operating plants (selected by the NRC, see Table B.1) has an annual mp dian probability of exceeding the SSE that is below this level. The reference probability is determined for the annual probability of exceeding the average of the 5 and
10 Hz SSE response spectrum ordinates associated with 5% of critical damping.


ceptable to the NRC staff to determine the reference                          B.3.1    Selection of Current Plants for Reference probability, an annual probability of exceeding the Safe                                Probability Calculations..
B.3 PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE
Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), at future nuclear power plant sites. The reference probability is                            Table B.1 identifies plants, along with their site used in Appendix C in conjunction with the probabilis                        characteristics, used in calculating the reference proba tic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).                                          bility. These plants represent relatively recent designs that used Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response B.2 REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE                                            Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants"
REFERENCE PROBABILITY
        SSE
The following procedure was used to determine the reference probability and should be used in the future if general revisions to PSHA methods or data bases result in significant changes in hazard predictions for the se lected plant sites in Table B.I.
                                                                              (Ref. B.5), or similar spectra as their design bases. The The reference probability is the annual probability                    use of these plants should ensure an adequate level of level such that 50% of a set of currently operating plants                    conservatism-in determining an SSE consistent with re (selected by the NRC, see Table B.1) has an annual mp                        cent licensing decisions.


dian probability of exceeding the SSE that is below this                      B3.2 Procedure To Establish Reference level. The reference probability is determined for the annual probability of exceeding the average of the 5 and                               Probability
The reference probability is calculated using the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL)
10 Hz SSE response spectrum ordinates associated                              Step 1 with 5% of critical damping.
methodology and results (Refs. B.1 and B.2) but is also considered applicable for the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) study (Refs. B.3 and B.4). This refer ence probability is also to be used in conjunction with sites not in the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) and for sites for which LLNL and EPRI meth ods and data have not been used or are not available.


Using LLNL, EPRI, or a comparable methodology B.3    PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE                                            that is acceptable to the NRC staff, calculate the seismic REFERENCE PROBABILITY
However, the final SSE at a higher reference probabili ty may be more appropriate and acceptable 1 for some sites considering the slope characteristics of the site hazard curves, the overall uncertainty in calculations (i.e., differences between mean and median hazard esti mates), and the knowledge of the seismic sources that contribute to the hazard. Reference B.4 includes a pro cedure to determine an alternative reference probability lThe use of a higher reference probability will be reviewed and accepted on a caseby-case basis.
                                                                              hazard results for the site for spectral responses at 5 and The following procedure was used to determine the                       10 Hz (as stated earlier, the staff used the LLNL meth reference probability and should be used in the future if                    odology and associated results as documented in Refs.


general revisions to PSHA methods or data bases result                        B.1 and B.2).
on the risk-based considerations; its application will also be reviewed on a case-by-case basis.
in significant changes in hazard predictions for the se Step 2 lected plant sites in Table B.I.


The reference probability is calculated using the                            Calculate the composite annual probability of ex ceeding the SSE for spectral responses at 5 and 10 Hz Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL)
B.3.1 Selection of Current Plants for Reference Probability Calculations..
methodology and results (Refs. B.1 and B.2) but is also                      using median hazard estimates. The composite annual considered applicable for the Electric Power Research                        probability is determined as:
Table B.1 identifies plants, along with their site characteristics, used in calculating the reference proba bility. These plants represent relatively recent designs that used Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants"
Institute (EPRI) study (Refs. B.3 and B.4). This refer Composite probability = 1/2(al) + 1/2(a2)
(Ref. B.5), or similar spectra as their design bases. The use of these plants should ensure an adequate level of conservatism-in determining an SSE consistent with re cent licensing decisions.
ence probability is also to be used in conjunction with sites not in the Central and Eastern United States                                  where al and a2 represent median annual probabil (CEUS) and for sites for which LLNL and EPRI meth                              ities of exceeding SSE spectral ordinates at 5 and 10
ods and data have not been used or are not available.                         Hz, respectively. The procedure is illustrated in Figure However, the final SSE at a higher reference probabili                        B-1.


ty may be more appropriate and acceptable 1 for some                          Step 3 sites considering the slope characteristics of the site hazard curves, the overall uncertainty in calculations                              Figure B-2 illustrates the distribution of median (i.e., differences between mean and median hazard esti                        probabilities of exceeding the SSEs for the plants in mates), and the knowledge of the seismic sources that                        Table B.1 based on the LLNL methodology (Refs. B.1 contribute to the hazard. Reference B.4 includes a pro                        and B.2). The reference probability is simply the me cedure to determine an alternative reference probability                      dian probability of this distribution.
B3.2 Procedure To Establish Reference Probability Step 1 Using LLNL, EPRI, or a comparable methodology that is acceptable to the NRC staff, calculate the seismic hazard results for the site for spectral responses at 5 and
10 Hz (as stated earlier, the staff used the LLNL meth odology and associated results as documented in Refs.


For the LLNL methodology, this reference proba bility is 1E-5/yr and, as stated earlier, is also to be used lThe use of a higher reference probability will be reviewed and accepted on    in conjunction with the current EPRI methodology a caseby-case basis.                                                          (Ref. B.3) or for sites not in the CEUS.
B.1 and B.2). 
Step 2 Calculate the composite annual probability of ex ceeding the SSE for spectral responses at 5 and 10 Hz using median hazard estimates. The composite annual probability is determined as:
Composite probability = 1/2(al) + 1/2(a2)
where al and a2 represent median annual probabil ities of exceeding SSE spectral ordinates at 5 and 10
Hz, respectively. The procedure is illustrated in Figure B-1.


1.165-12
Step 3 Figure B-2 illustrates the distribution of median probabilities of exceeding the SSEs for the plants in Table B.1 based on the LLNL methodology (Refs. B.1 and B.2). The reference probability is simply the me dian probability of this distribution.


Table B.A
For the LLNL methodology, this reference proba bility is 1E-5/yr and, as stated earlier, is also to be used in conjunction with the current EPRI methodology (Ref. B.3) or for sites not in the CEUS.
                                      Plants/Sites Used In Determining Reference Probability Soil Condition                                                                             Soil Condition Plant/Site Name                   Primary/Secondary*                                       Plant/Site Name                 Primary/Secondary*
 
limerick                           Rock                                                     Byron                           Rock Shearon Harris                     Sand - S1                                                 Clinton                         Till - T3 Braidwood                         Rock                                                     Davis Besse                     Rock River Bend                         Deep Soil                                                 LaSalle                         Till - T2 Wolf Creek                         Rock                                                     Perry                           Rock Watts Bar                         Rock                                                     Bellefonte                       Rock Vogtle                             Deep Soil                                                 Callaway                         Rock/Sand - S1 Seabrook                           Rock                                                     Comanche Peak                   Rock Three Mile Is.                     Rock/Sand - S1                                           Grand Gulf                       Deep Soil Catawba                           Rock/Sand - S1                                           South Texas                     Deep Soil Hope Creek                         Deep Soil                                                 Waterfoid                       Deep Soil McGuire                           Rock                                                     Millstone 3                     Rock North Anna                         Rock/Sand - S1                                           Nine Mile Point                 Rock/Sand - S1 Summer                             Rock/Sand - S1                                           -Brunswick                       Sand - S1 Beaver Valley                     Sand - Si
1.165-12 K
*Iftwo soil conditions are listed, the first is the primary and the second is the secondary soil condition. See Ref. B.1 for a discussion of soil conditions.
 
Table B.A  
Plants/Sites Used In Determining Reference Probability Soil Condition Soil Condition Plant/Site Name Primary/Secondary*  
Plant/Site Name Primary/Secondary*  
limerick Rock Byron Rock Shearon Harris Sand - S1 Clinton Till - T3 Braidwood Rock Davis Besse Rock River Bend Deep Soil LaSalle Till - T2 Wolf Creek Rock Perry Rock Watts Bar Rock Bellefonte Rock Vogtle Deep Soil Callaway Rock/Sand - S1 Seabrook Rock Comanche Peak Rock Three Mile Is.
 
Rock/Sand - S1 Grand Gulf Deep Soil Catawba Rock/Sand - S1 South Texas Deep Soil Hope Creek Deep Soil Waterfoid Deep Soil McGuire Rock Millstone 3 Rock North Anna Rock/Sand - S1 Nine Mile Point Rock/Sand - S1 Summer Rock/Sand - S1  
-Brunswick Sand - S1 Beaver Valley Sand - Si  
*If two soil conditions are listed, the first is the primary and the second is the secondary soil condition. See Ref. B.1 for a discussion of soil conditions.


1.165-13
1.165-13


CD
al
0
>11
    al a. 4---*
4---*  
          >11
"
                                            5 Hz Spectral Response
tW
        "    tW                              Median Hazard Curve
I
                                        10 Hz Spectral Response Median Hazard Curve I
5 Hz Spectral Response Median Hazard Curve  
                    Spectral Response Figure B.1 Procedure To Compute Probability of Exceeding Design Basis
10 Hz Spectral Response Median Hazard Curve Spectral Response Figure B.1 Procedure To Compute Probability of Exceeding Design Basis
                          1.165-14
1.165-14 CD
 
0
1.0                                                       1                        1                          i *I
a.
                        " '     'i          I 1' 1''''11                                   g  I  i  g  i  i l  i    ;
 
                                                                                        0
1
                                                                                    0
1
                                                                                0
1.0  
  0.9                                                                          0
0.9
                                                                              0
0.8
                                                                              0
0.7
  0.8                                                                    .0
0
                                                                          0
----
                                                                      0
----
                                                                      0
----
  0.7                                                                0
---
                                                                      0
- Q
                                                                    0
0
C2                                                                0
0'
.0 0.6                                                          0
0'  
                                                                0
0
                                                              0
o
  0.5              ----
':
                      ----          ----      ---    -    Q
0 o I
0
o
0 o
0
0
0I
I
I
I
I
SI II
10-5 w
W
cc V,
10-4
10-3 Composite Probability of Exceeding SSE
Figure B.2 Probability of Exceeding SSE
Using Median LLNL Hazard Estimates
1.165-15 I 1 ' 1' '''11 C2
.0  
0
0.6
0. 5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.0
1 0-7
10-6 I ~ ~~
~~~~~~~
0  
lIl
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
l i
;
" '
'i g
I
i g
i i
i
* I
0  
0  
0  
0  
0  
0  
.0  
0
0  
0  
0  
0  
0  
0
                                                             0
                                                             0
0
0
                                                      0'
,  
  0.4
.
                                                      0'
. . * * ,,I
  0.3                                            0            w o          ': W
,  
                                              o00          I
.
                                                                cc
o , .,..!
  0.2                                        o                V,
I I
                                            0
                                            0o
  0.1
                                            0
                                          0I
          ,  . ~~~~~~~
                    . ~. ~~
                          * * ,,I                                 ,   . o , .,..!                         SIII
  0.0            I                       0            lIl            .      .  .  .
                                                                                            I
                                                                                            .
                                                                                                I  I
                                                                                                  .
                                                                                                      I
                                                                                                          .      .
    1 0-7                    10-6                          10-5                    10-4                        10-3 Composite Probability of Exceeding SSE
                                      Figure B.2 Probability of Exceeding SSE
                                                    Using Median LLNL Hazard Estimates
                                                1.165-15 II


REFERENCES
REFERENCES
B.1 D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac                                   States: Resolution of the Charleston Earthquake terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the                             Issue," Report NP-6395-D, April 1989.
B.1 D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, January
1989.1 B.2 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"
NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1 B.3 Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United lCopies are available for inspection orcopyingfora fee from the NRC Pub lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Wash ington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
 
States: Resolution of the Charleston Earthquake Issue," Report NP-6395-D, April 1989.
 
B.4 Attachment to Letter from D. J. Modeen, Nuclear Energy Institute, to A.J. Murphy, USNRC, Sub ject: Seismic Siting Decision Process, May 25,
1994.2 B.5 USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.60.3
2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Pub lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
 
3Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Atta: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,
Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
 
1.165-16 K
 
APPENDIX C
DETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES AND DEVELOPMENT
OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE
C.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix elaborates on the steps described in Regulatory Position 3 of this rqgulatory'guide to deter mine the controlling earthquakes used to define the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE) at the site and to develop a seismic hazard information base. The information base summarizes the contribu tion of individual magnitude and distance ranges to the seismic hazard and the magnitude and distance values of the controlling earthquakes at the average of 1 and
2.5 Hz and the average of 5 and 10 Hz. They are devel oped for the ground motion level corresponding to the reference probability as defined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide.
 
The spectral ground motion levels, as determined from a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA),
are used to scale a response spectrum shape. A site specific response spectrum shape is determined for the controlling earthquakes and local site conditions. Reg ulatory Position 4 and Appendix F to this regulatory guide describe a procedure 'to determine the SSE using the controlling earthquakes and results from the PSHA.


K
C.2 PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE
        Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, January
CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES
        1989.1                                                            B.4 Attachment to Letter from D. J. Modeen, Nuclear Energy Institute, to A.J. Murphy, USNRC, Sub B.2 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard                                      ject: Seismic Siting Decision Process, May 25, Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant                                1994.2 Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"
The following is an approach acceptable to the NRC staff for determining the controlling earthquakes and developing a seismic hazard information base. This procedure is based on a de-aggregation of the probabi
        NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1                                   B.5 USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory B.3 Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic                                Guide 1.60.3 Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power
-listic seismic hazard in terms of earthquake magnitudes and distances. Once the 'controlling earthquakes have been obtained, the SSE response spectrum can be deter- mined according to the procedure described in Appen dix F to this regulatory guide.
                                                                          2 Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United                        Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Pub lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
 
                                                                            (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
Step I
Perform a site-specific PSHA using the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) or.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) methodologies for Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) sites or per form a site-specific PSHA for sites not in the CEUS or for sites for which LLNL or EPRI methods and data are not applicable, for actual or assumed rock conditions.
 
The hazard assessment (mean, median, 85th percentile, and 15th percentile) should be performed for spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, 10, and 25 Hz, and the peak ground acceleration. A lower-bound magnitude of 5.0
'is recommended.
 
Step 2 (a) Using the reference probability (1E-5/yr) as de fined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide, determine the ground motion levels for the spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total median hazard ob tained in Step 1.
 
(b) Calculate the average of the ground motion lev el for the I and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hz spectral ac celeration pairs.


lCopies are available for inspection orcopyingfora fee from the NRC Pub    3 lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's            Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone          tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Atta: Dis
Step 3 Perform a complete probabilistic seismic hazard analysis for each of the magnitude-distance bins illustrated in Table C.1. (These magnitude-distance bins are to be used in conjunction with the LLNL or EPRI methods. For other situations, other binning schemes may be necessary.)
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current        tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Wash        by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying ington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National        for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,
Table CA
Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road,      Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash Springfield, VA 22161.                                                      ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range
"
of Bin (kn)  
5-5.5
5.5-6
6-6.5
6.5-7
>7
0-15
15-25
25-50
50-100
100-200
200 -300
>300
1.165-17


1.165-16
Step 4 From the de-aggregated results of Step 3, the me dian annual probability of exceeding the ground mo tion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5,
5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each magnitude distance bin. These values are denoted by Hmdf.


APPENDIX C
Using Hmdf values, the fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d)1, is computed ac cording to:
          DETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES AND DEVELOPMENT
(>.lmHf)
                              OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE
-
C.1 INTRODUCTION                                            mined according to the procedure described in Appen dix F to this regulatory guide.
2 Equation (1)
2 rM
d where f =1 and f =2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.


This appendix elaborates on the steps described in Step I
The fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 5 and  
Regulatory Position 3 of this rqgulatory'guide to deter mine the controlling earthquakes used to define the              Perform a site-specific PSHA using the Lawrence Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE) at              Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) or.Electric the site and to develop a seismic hazard information        Power Research Institute (EPRI) methodologies for base. The information base summarizes the contribu          Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) sites or per tion of individual magnitude and distance ranges to the      form a site-specific PSHA for sites not in the CEUS or seismic hazard and the magnitude and distance values        for sites for which LLNL or EPRI methods and data are of the controlling earthquakes at the average of 1 and       not applicable, for actual or assumed rock conditions.
10 Hz, P(md)2, is computed according to:
2 d
2 p
4 Equation (2)
where f = I and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.


2.5 Hz and the average of 5 and 10 Hz. They are devel        The hazard assessment (mean, median, 85th percentile, oped for the ground motion level corresponding to the       and 15th percentile) should be performed for spectral reference probability as defined in Appendix B to this      accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, 10, and 25 Hz, and the peak regulatory guide.                                            ground acceleration. A lower-bound magnitude of 5.0
Step S
                                                            'is recommended.
Review the magnitude-distance distribution for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whether the con tribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km or great er is substantial (on the order of 5% or greater).
If the contribution to the hazard for distances of
100 km or greater exceeds 5%, additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes us ing the magnitude-distance distribution for distances greater than 100 km (63 mi). This distribution, P>loo(md)l, is defined by:
P > 100 (m, d), =
P(m9d)
1 m d>100
Equation (3)
The purpose of this calculation is to identify a dis tant, larger event that may control low-frequency con tent of a response spectrum.


The spectral ground motion levels, as determined from a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA),        Step 2 are used to scale a response spectrum shape. A site              (a) Using the reference probability (1E-5/yr) as de specific response spectrum shape is determined for the      fined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide, determine controlling earthquakes and local site conditions. Reg      the ground motion levels for the spectral accelerations ulatory Position 4 and Appendix F to this regulatory        at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total median hazard ob guide describe a procedure 'to determine the SSE using      tained in Step 1.
The distance of 100 km is chosen for CEUS sites.


the controlling earthquakes and results from the PSHA.
However, for all sites the results of full magnitude distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling earthquakes are clearly identified.


(b) Calculate the average of the ground motion lev C.2 PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE                                  el for the I and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hz spectral ac CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES                                celeration pairs.
Step 6 Calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 5 and  
10 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude distance bins matrix:
Me(5-10Hz) = >mEjP(md),
m d
Equation (4)
where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.


Step 3 The following is an approach acceptable to the NRC staff for determining the controlling earthquakes            Perform a complete probabilistic seismic hazard and developing a seismic hazard information base. This      analysis for each of the magnitude-distance bins procedure is based on a de-aggregation of the probabi        illustrated in Table C.1. (These magnitude-distance
The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is determined using results of the entire magnitude distance bins matrix:
-listicseismic hazard in terms of earthquake magnitudes      bins are to be used in conjunction with the LLNL or and distances. Once the 'controlling earthquakes have        EPRI methods. For other situations, other binning been obtained, the SSE response spectrum can be deter-        schemes may be necessary.)
Ln{D.(5-10Hz)} = >jLn(d)>jP(md)2 d
                                                      Table CA
m Equation (5)
                                    Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range                                                "
where d is the centroid distance value for each dis tance bin.
          of Bin (kn)         5-5.5            5.5-6              6-6.5              6.5-7              >7
          0-15
          15-25
          25-50
          50-100
          100-200
          200 -300
          >300
                                                      1.165-17


Step 4                                                            The purpose of this calculation is to identify a dis tant, larger event that may control low-frequency con From the de-aggregated results of Step 3, the me        tent of a response spectrum.
Step 7 If the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 for distances of 100 km or greater exceeds 5% for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquakes associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations based on magnitude-distance bins greater than dis tances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4:
M. (1 - 2.5 Hz)
M
rn P > 100 (m, d)
M
d>100
Equation (6)
where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.


dian annual probability of exceeding the ground mo The distance of 100 km is chosen for CEUS sites.
The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is based on magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4 and deter mined according to:
1.165-18 I-.
P(M, d)2


tion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, However, for all sites the results of full magnitude I-.
Ln {D,(1 - 2.5 Hz)} =
5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each magnitude distance bin. These values are denoted by Hmdf.              distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling earthquakes are clearly Using Hmdf values, the fractional contribution of        identified.
Ln(d)
P > 100(m,d),  
d>10
.,
Equation (7)  
where d is the centroid distance value for each dis tance bin.


each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for Step 6 the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d) 1 , is computed ac cording to:                                                        Calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with the ground
Step 8 Determine the SSE response spectrum using the procedure described in Appendix F of this regulatory guide.
                (>.lmHf)                                    motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 5 and
                                                              10 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude
          -          2                    Equation (1)      distance bins matrix:
                                                                Me(5-10Hz) = >mEjP(md),
                rM  d
                              2                                                        m      d Equation (4)
    where f =1 and f =2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.                            where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.


The fractional contribution of each magnitude and             The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 5 and    determined using results of the entire magnitude
C.3 EXAMPLE FOR A CEUS SITE
10 Hz, P(md)2, is computed according to:                      distance bins matrix:
To illustrate the procedure in Section C.2, calcula tions are shown here for a CEUS site using the 1993 LLNL hazard results (Refs. C.1 and C.2). It must be emphasized that the recommended magnitude and dis tance bins and procedure used to establish controlling earthquakes were developed for application in the CEUS where the nearby earthquakes generally control the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larg er but distant events can control the lower frequency range. For other situations, alternative binning schemes as well as a study of contributions from various bins will be necessary to identify controlling earthquakes consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.
                                                              Ln{D.(5-10Hz)} = >jLn(d)>jP(md)                  2 d        m
                      2                    Equation (2)                                                    Equation (5)
P(M,d)2 where d is the centroid distance value for each dis tance bin.


p  d
Step 1 The 1993 LLNL seismic hazard methodology (Refs. C.1 and C.2) was used to determine the hazard at the site. A lower bound magnitude of 5.0 was used in this analysis. The analysis was performed for spectral acceleration at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10Hz. The resultant hazard curves are plotted in Figure C.1.
                    4        2 Step 7 where f = I and f = 2 represent the ground motion              If the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.                         for distances of 100 km or greater exceeds 5% for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude Step S                                                        and distance of the controlling earthquakes associated Review the magnitude-distance distribution for the        with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whether the con          average of 1 and 2.5 Hz. The following relation is used tribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km or great      to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations er is substantial (on the order of 5% or greater).             based on magnitude-distance bins greater than dis tances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4:
    If the contribution to the hazard for distances of M. (1 - 2.5 Hz)          rn M        P > 100 (m, d)
100 km or greater exceeds 5%, additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes us                                  M      d>100
ing the magnitude-distance distribution for distances                                                        Equation (6)
greater than 100 km (63 mi). This distribution, where m is the central magnitude value for each P>loo(md)l, is defined by:
                                                              magnitude bin.


P(m9d)                                  The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is P > 100 (m,d), =                1        Equation (3)      based on magnitude-distance bins greater than m d>100                                distances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4 and deter mined according to:
Step 2 The hazard curves at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz obtained in Step I are assessed at the reference probability value of 1E-5/yr, as defined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide. The corresponding ground motion level values are given in Table C.2. See Figure C.1.
                                                        1.165-18


Step 3 Ln {D,(1 - 2.5 Hz)}      =      Ln(d)    P >100(m,d),
The average of the ground motion levels at the 1 and 2.5 Hz, Sa1-2.5, and 5 and 10 Hz, Sa5-10, are given in Table C.3.
                            d>10   .,                           The median seismic hazard is de-aggregated for the matrix of magnitude and distance bins as given in Equation (7)      Table C.1.


where d is the centroid distance value for each dis          A complete probabilistic hazard analysis was per tance bin.                                                  formed for each bin to determine the contribution to the hazard from all earthquakes within the bin, e.g., all Step 8                                                      earthquakes with magnitudes 6 to 6.5 and distance 25 to Determine the SSE response spectrum using the          50 km from the site. See Figure C.2 where the median 1 procedure described in Appendix F of this regulatory        Hz hazard curve is plotted for distance bin 25 - 50 km and magnitude bin 6 - 6.5.
Step 3 The median seismic hazard is de-aggregated for the matrix of magnitude and distance bins as given in Table C.1.


guide.
A complete probabilistic hazard analysis was per formed for each bin to determine the contribution to the hazard from all earthquakes within the bin, e.g., all earthquakes with magnitudes 6 to 6.5 and distance 25 to
50 km from the site. See Figure C.2 where the median 1 Hz hazard curve is plotted for distance bin 25 - 50 km and magnitude bin 6 - 6.5.


The hazard vaiues corresponding to the ground C.3 EXAMPLE FOR A CEUS SITE
The hazard vaiues corresponding to the ground motion levels found in step 2, and listed in Table C.2, are then determined from the hazard curve for each bin for spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz. This process is illustrated in Figure C.2. The vertical line corresponds to the value 88 cm/s/s listed in Table C.2 for the 1 Hz hazard curve and intersects the hazard curve for the 25 - 50 bin, 6 - 6.5 bin at a hazard value (probability of exceedance) of 2.14E-08 per year.
                                                              motion levels found in step 2, and listed in Table C.2, To illustrate the procedure in Section C.2, calcula    are then determined from the hazard curve for each bin tions are shown here for a CEUS site using the 1993          for spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz. This LLNL hazard results (Refs. C.1 and C.2). It must be          process is illustrated in Figure C.2. The vertical line emphasized that the recommended magnitude and dis            corresponds to the value 88 cm/s/s listed in Table C.2 tance bins and procedure used to establish controlling      for the 1 Hz hazard curve and intersects the hazard earthquakes were developed for application in the            curve for the 25 - 50 bin, 6 - 6.5 bin at a hazard value CEUS where the nearby earthquakes generally control          (probability of exceedance) of 2.14E-08 per year.


the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larg    Tables C.4 to C.7 list the appropriate hazard value for er but distant events can control the lower frequency        each bin for 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz respectively.
Tables C.4 to C.7 list the appropriate hazard value for each bin for 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz respectively.


range. For other situations, alternative binning schemes          It should be noted that if the median hazard in as well as a study of contributions from various bins        each of the 35 bins is added up it does not equal will be necessary to identify controlling earthquakes        1.0E--05. That is because the sum of the median of consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.          each of the bins does not equal the overall median.
It should be noted that if the median hazard in each of the 35 bins is added up it does not equal  
1.0E--05. That is because the sum of the median of each of the bins does not equal the overall median.


However, if we gave the mean hazard for each bin it Step 1 would add up to the overall mean hazard curve.
However, if we gave the mean hazard for each bin it would add up to the overall mean hazard curve.


The 1993 LLNL seismic hazard methodology                Step 4 (Refs. C.1 and C.2) was used to determine the hazard at the site. A lower bound magnitude of 5.0 was used in              Using de-aggregated median hazard results, the this analysis. The analysis was performed for spectral      fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pair acceleration at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10Hz. The resultant hazard    to the total hazard is determined.
Step 4 Using de-aggregated median hazard results, the fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pair to the total hazard is determined.


curves are plotted in Figure C.1.                                  Tables C.8 and C.9 show P(m,d)I and P(m,d) 2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and 5 and 10 Hz, Step 2 respectively.
Tables C.8 and C.9 show P(m,d)I and P(m,d)2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.


The hazard curves at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz obtained      Step 5 in Step I are assessed at the reference probability value of 1E-5/yr, as defined in Appendix B to this regulatory            Because the contribution of the distance bins guide. The corresponding ground motion level values          greater than 100 km in Table C.8 contains more than are given in Table C.2. See Figure C.1.                      5% of the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, the controlling earthquake for the spectral average of 1 The average of the ground motion levels at the 1        and 2.5 Hz will be calculated using magnitude-distance and 2.5 Hz, Sa1-2.5, and 5 and 10 Hz, Sa5-10, are given      bins for distance greater than 100 kmn. Table C.1O
Step 5 Because the contribution of the distance bins greater than 100 km in Table C.8 contains more than  
in Table C.3.                                                shows P>I0 0 (md)l for the average of 1 to 2.5 Hz.
5% of the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, the controlling earthquake for the spectral average of 1 and 2.5 Hz will be calculated using magnitude-distance bins for distance greater than 100 kmn. Table C.1O  
shows P>I00 (md)l for the average of 1 to 2.5 Hz.


1,165-19
1,165-19
                                                                                          ,II
,II


Table C.2 Ground Motion Levels Frequency (Hz)                       1     1     2.5         5         10
Table C.2 Ground Motion Levels Frequency (Hz)  
            Spectral Acc. (cm/s/s)         I     88         258         351       551         K
1  
                                                Table C.3 Average Ground Motion Values Sal-2.5 (cm/s/s)                           173 S -s.io(cra/s/s)                           451 Table C.4 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at I Hz (88 cm/s/s)
1  
                                                  Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)           5-5.5               5.5-6             6-6.5             6.5-7         >7
2.5  
  0-15         1.98E-08           9.44E-08           1.14E-08             0             0
5  
  15-25         4.03E-09           2.58E-08           2.40E-09             0             0
10  
  25-50         1.72E-09           3.03E-08           2.14E-08             0             0
Spectral Acc. (cm/s/s)  
  50-100         2.35E-10             1.53E-08           7.45E-08         2.50E-08         0
I  
100-200         1.OOE-11           2.36E-09           8.53E-08         6.101-07         0
88  
200 - 300           0               1.90E-11           1.60E.-09       1.84E-08         0
258  
  > 300             0                   0             8.99E-12         1.03E--11     1.69E-10
351  
                                                Table C.5 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 2.5 Hz (258 cm/s/s)
551 Table C.3 Average Ground Motion Values Sal-2.5 (cm/s/s)  
                                                  Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)           5-5.5               5.5-6.             6-6.5           6.5 -7         >7
173 S -s.io (cra/s/s)  
  0-15         2.24E-07           3.33E-07           4.12E-08             0             0
451 Table C.4 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at I Hz (88 cm/s/s)
  15-25         5.39E-08             1.20E-07           1.08E-08             0             0
Distance Range of Bin (km)  
  25-50         2.60E-08             1.68E-07           6.39E-08             0             0
5-5.5  
  50-100         3.91E-09             6.27E-08           1.46E-07         4.09E-08         0
5.5-6  
100-200         1.50E-10           7.801E-09         1.07E-07         4.75E-07         0
6-6.5  
200 -300       7.16E-14             2.07E-11           7.47E-10         5.02E-09         0
6.5-7  
                                                                                                K
>7  
    > 300             0               1.52E-14           4.94E-13         9.05E-15     2.36E-15
0-15  
                                                1.165-20 -,
1.98E-08  
9.44E-08  
1.14E-08  
0  
0  
15-25  
4.03E-09  
2.58E-08  
2.40E-09  
0  
0  
25-50  
1.72E-09  
3.03E-08  
2.14E-08  
0  
0  
50-100  
2.35E-10  
1.53E-08  
7.45E-08  
2.50E-08  
0  
100-200  
1.OOE-11  
2.36E-09  
8.53E-08  
6.101-07  
0  
200 - 300  
0  
1.90E-11  
1.60E.-09  
1.84E-08  
0  
> 300  
0  
0  
8.99E-12  
1.03E--11  
1.69E-10  
Table C.5 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 2.5 Hz (258 cm/s/s)  
Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)  
5-5.5  
5.5-6.
 
6-6.5  
6.5 -7  
>7  
0-15  
2.24E-07  
3.33E-07  
4.12E-08  
0  
0  
15-25  
5.39E-08  
1.20E-07  
1.08E-08  
0  
0  
25-50  
2.60E-08  
1.68E-07  
6.39E-08  
0  
0  
50-100  
3.91E-09  
6.27E-08  
1.46E-07  
4.09E-08  
0  
100-200  
1.50E-10  
7.801E-09  
1.07E-07  
4.75E-07  
0  
200 -300  
7.16E-14  
2.07E-11  
7.47E-10  
5.02E-09  
0  
> 300  
0  
1.52E-14  
4.94E-13  
9.05E-15  
2.36E-15
1.165-20 -,
K
Magnitude Range of Bin K


Table 0.6 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 5 Hz (351 cm/sls)
Table 0.6 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 5 Hz (351 cm/sls)
                                        Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (kmi)       5-5.5       5.5-6             6-6.5             6.5-7   >7
Distance Range of Bin (kmi)  
  0-15       4.96E-07     5.85E-07         5.16E-08               0     0
5-5.5  
  15-25       9.39E-08     2.02E-07         1.36E-08             *0     0
5.5-6  
  25-50       2.76E-08     1.84E-07.        7.56E-08              0    0
6-6.5  
  50- 100      1.23E-08      3.34E-08          9.98E-08          2.85E-08  0
6.5-7  
100 - 200    8.06E-12      1.14E-09          2.54E-08          1.55E-07  0
>7  
200 -300          0        2.39E-13          2.72E-11          4.02E-10  0
0-15  
  > 300          0            0                0                  0    0
4.96E-07  
                                      Table C.7 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 10 Hz (551 cmlsls)
5.85E-07  
                                    _ __Magnitude  Range of Bin.
5.16E-08  
0  
0  
15-25  
9.39E-08  
2.02E-07  
1.36E-08  
*0  
0  
25-50  
2.76E-08  
1.84E-07.


Distance Range of Bin (km)        5-5.5        5.5-6            6-6.5              6.5-7    >7
7.56E-08  
  0-15        1.11E-06      1.12E-06          8.30E-08               0    0
0  
  15-25        2.07E-07      3.77E-07          3.12E-08              0    0
0  
  25 -50       4.12E-08      235E-07          1.03E-07              0    0
50- 100
  50-100      5.92E-10      2.30E-08         6.89E-08           2.71E-08 0
1.23E-08
          S100-200
3.34E-08  
              1.26E-12     1.69E-10          6.66E-09          5.43E-08  0
9.98E-08  
200-300           0         3.90E-15          6.16E-13           2.34E-11 0
2.85E-08  
  > 300           0             0                 0                 0     0
0  
                                      1.165-21
100 - 200  
8.06E-12  
1.14E-09
2.54E-08
1.55E-07
0  
200 -300  
0  
2.39E-13  
2.72E-11  
4.02E-10
0  
> 300  
0  
0  
0  
0  
0  
Table C.7 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 10 Hz (551 cmlsls)
_ __Magnitude Range of Bin.


C.8 P(m,d)1 for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz STable Corresponding to the Reference Probability
Distance Range of Bin (km)  
                                    _  _ _Magnitude        Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)         5-5.5             5.5-6               6-6.5           6.5-7     >7
5-5.5  
    0-15         0.083              0.146                0.018          0.000  0.000
5.5-6  
    15-25       0.020              0.050                0.005          0.000  0.000
6-6.5  
  25-50         0.009              0.067                0.029          0.000  0.000
6.5-7  
  50-100       0.001              0.027                0.075          0.022  0.000
>7  
  100-200        0.000              0.003                0.066          0.370  0.000
0-15  
  200 -300      0.000              0.000                0.001          0.008  0.000
1.11E-06
      300        0.000              0.000                0.000          0.000  0.000
1.12E-06
                                            Table C.9 P(m,d)2 for Average Spectral Accelerations 5 and 10 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability
8.30E-08
          _________Magnitude                              Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)        5-5.5              5.5-6               6-6.5            6.5-7      >7
0  
    0-15        0.289              0.306                0.024          0.000  0.000
0  
  15-25        0.054              0.104                0.008          0.000  0.000
15-25  
  25 -50        0.012              0.075            -   0.032          0.000  0.000
2.07E-07
  50-100        0.001              0.010              .-0.030          0.010 "  0.000
3.77E-07
.100-200        0.000              0.001                0.006          0.038  0.000
3.12E-08
  200-300       0.000              0.000                0.000          0.000  0.000
0  
  - > 300        0.000              0.000                0.000          0.000  0.000
0  
                                          Table C.10
25 -50  
            P> 1 00 (m,d)l for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)        5-5.5              5.5-6                6-6.5            6.5-7      >7
4.12E-08
  100-200        0.000              0.007                0.147          0.826  0.000
235E-07
  200-300        0.000              0.000                0.002          0.018  0.000
1.03E-07
    >300         0.000              0.000                0.000          0.000  0.000
0  
                                              1.165-22-
0  
50-100  
5.92E-10
2.30E-08
6.89E-08
2.71E-08
0  
S100-200
1.26E-12
1.69E-10
6.66E-09
5.43E-08
0  
200-300  
0  
3.90E-15
6.16E-13
2.34E-11
0  
> 300  
0  
0  
0  
0  
0
1.165-21 Magnitude Range of Bin


Figures C.3 to C.5 show the above information in      Step 8 terms of the relative percentage contribution.
STable C.8 P(m,d)1 for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability
_
_
_Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)
5-5.5
5.5-6
6-6.5
6.5-7
>7
0-15
0.083
0.146
0.018
0.000
0.000
15-25
0.020
0.050
0.005
0.000
0.000
25-50
0.009
0.067
0.029
0.000
0.000
50-100
0.001
0.027
0.075
0.022
0.000
100-200
0.000
0.003
0.066
0.370
0.000
200 -300
0.000
0.000
0.001
0.008
0.000
300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table C.9 P(m,d)2 for Average Spectral Accelerations 5 and 10 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability
_________Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)
5-5.5
5.5-6
6-6.5
6.5-7
>7
0-15
0.289
0.306
0.024
0.000
0.000
15-25
0.054
0.104
0.008
0.000
0.000
25 -50
0.012
0.075
-
0.032
0.000
0.000
50-100
0.001
0.010
.-0.030
0.010
"
0.000
.100-200
0.000
0.001
0.006
0.038
0.000
200-300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
- > 300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
Table C.10
P> 1 00 (m,d)l for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)
5-5.5
5.5-6
6-6.5
6.5-7
>7
100-200
0.000
0.007
0.147
0.826
0.000
200-300
0.000
0.000
0.002
0.018
0.000
>300
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
1.165-22-


The SSE response spectrum is determined by the procedures described in Appendix F.
Figures C.3 to C.5 show the above information in terms of the relative percentage contribution.


Steps 6 and 7 C.4 SITES NOT IN THE CEUS
Steps 6 and 7 To compute the controlling magnitudes and distances at 1 to 2.5 Hz and 5 to 10 Hz for the example site, the values of P> 100 (m,d)l and P(m,d)2 are used with m and d values corresponding to the mid-point of the magnitude of the bin (5.25, 5.75, 6.25, 6.75, 7.3)  
      To compute the controlling magnitudes and                 The determination of the controlling earthquakes distances at 1 to 2.5 Hz and 5 to 10 Hz for the example     and the seismic hazard information base for sites not in site, the values of P> 10 0 (m,d)l and P(m,d) 2 are used   the CEUS is also carried out using the procedure with m and d values corresponding to the mid-point of       described in Section C.2 of this appendix. However, the magnitude of the bin (5.25, 5.75, 6.25, 6.75, 7.3)     because of differences in seismicity rates and ground and centroid of the ring area (10, 20.4, 38.9, 77.8,       motion attenuation at these sites, alternative
and centroid of the ring area (10, 20.4, 38.9, 77.8,  
155.6, 253.3, and somewhat arbitrarily 350 km). Note       magnitude-distance bins may have to be used. In addi that the mid-point of the last magnitude bin may change     tion, as discussed in Appendix B, an alternative refer because this value is dependent on the maximum mag         ence probability may also have to be developed, par nitudes used in the hazard analysis. For this example       ticularly for sites in the active plate margin region and site, the controlling earthquake characteristics (magni     for sites at which a known tectonic structure dominates tudes and distances) are given in Table C.11.              the hazard.
155.6, 253.3, and somewhat arbitrarily 350 km). Note that the mid-point of the last magnitude bin may change because this value is dependent on the maximum mag nitudes used in the hazard analysis. For this example site, the controlling earthquake characteristics (magni tudes and distances) are given in Table C.11.


Table C.11 Magnitudes and Distances of Controlling Earthquakes from the LLNL Probabilistic Analysis
Step 8 The SSE response spectrum is determined by the procedures described in Appendix F.
                                        1-2.51Hz                 5 - 10Hz Mc and Dc > 100 km             MK and Dc
 
                                    6.7 and 157 km             5.7 and 17 km
C.4 SITES NOT IN THE CEUS
                                                    1.165-23 II
The determination of the controlling earthquakes and the seismic hazard information base for sites not in the CEUS is also carried out using the procedure described in Section C.2 of this appendix. However, because of differences in seismicity rates and ground motion attenuation at these sites, alternative magnitude-distance bins may have to be used. In addi tion, as discussed in Appendix B, an alternative refer ence probability may also have to be developed, par ticularly for sites in the active plate margin region and for sites at which a known tectonic structure dominates the hazard.
 
Table C.11 Magnitudes and Distances of Controlling Earthquakes from the LLNL Probabilistic Analysis  
1-2.51Hz  
5 - 10Hz Mc and Dc > 100 km MK and Dc  
6.7 and 157 km  
5.7 and 17 km
1.165-23
.I
I
II


K
K
  .01. e
.01. e  
                              "01-0-..,             1H z e-
"01-0-..,  
1.01 e-6                                        no."*
1H z  
              *                        .
.01 e- no."*  
                                                      ~~N.
~~N.


I e-8
1 e-6 I  
                                            \N
e-8 Ile-9
le--85 Ile-9                                              *.
*
      10                   100                         1000
                      Sa ~cm/s**2 Figure C.A Total Median Hazard Curves
\\ N  
                          1.165-24
le--85  
*.
10  
100  
1000  
Sa ~cm/s**2 Figure C.A Total Median Hazard Curves
1.165-24


.001 le-4
.001 le-4  
1e-5 le-6
1 e-5 le-6  
1e-7
1 e-7  
1e-8
1 e-8  
1e-9
1 e-9  
    10                   100                     1000
10  
                    Sa   - cm/s**2 Figure C.2 1 Hz Median Hazard'Curve for Distance Bin 25 - 50 km & Magnitude Bin 6 - 6.5
100  
                      1,165-25
1000  
Sa - cm/s**2 Figure C.2 1 Hz Median Hazard'Curve for Distance Bin 25 - 50 km & Magnitude Bin 6 - 6.5  
1,165-25


0
Magnitude bins
"D5c
25-50
50-100
0
Distance bins
1020200-300
> 300
Figure C.3 Full Distribution for Average of 5 and 10 Hz K
1.165--26
0
0  
"I
"I
0.
'5 0.
 
'5
0
                                                              Magnitude bins
  "D5c 25-50  50-100
                                                0
    Distance bins    1020200-300          > 300
      Figure C.3 Full Distribution for Average of 5 and 10 Hz K
                          1.165--26


35
35
      *)25
.0
  .0
*)25
  .0
.0  
-        15
-
                                                                                  **66.5->7
15
  *.     O
*.  
                                                                                            Magnitude bins
O
            0-15 15-25 "     *"--*         .*                               5-5.5
**66.5->7 Magnitude bins
                        25-50 50-100
5-5.5
                                          100-200 200-300
0-15  
                      Distance bins                           > 300
15-25 "  
                      Figure C.4 Full Distribution for Average of 1 and 2.5 Hz
*"--*  
                                            1.165-27 I I
.*  
25-50  
50-100 100-200 200-300  
Distance bins
> 300
Figure C.4 Full Distribution for Average of 1 and 2.5 Hz  
1.165-27 I  
I


K
/>300
200-300
Distance bins Man5 d b6-6.5 Magnitude bins
6.5-7
">7 Figure C.5 Renormalized Hazard Distribution for Distances >100 km for Average of I and 2.5 Hz
1.165-28 K
0.
0.


/>300
REFERENCES
                                                                        200-300
C.1 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains, NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1 lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
                                                                              Distance bins Man5 d b6-6.5 Magnitude bins          6.5-7
Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
                                                  ">7 Figure C.5 Renormalized Hazard Distribution for Distances >100 km for Average of I and 2.5 Hz
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
                              1.165-28


REFERENCES
C.2 J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Charac terization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Law rence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 (Accession number 9310190318 in NRC's Pub lic Document Room).2
C.1 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard                          C.2 J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Charac Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant                              terization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Law Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,                                          rence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1                                            (Accession number 9310190318 in NRC's Pub
2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC  
                                                                                                                2 lic Document Room).
Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; thePDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone  
lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current
                                                                          2 rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082,            Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the          Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; thePDR's National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port        mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.                                        (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


1.165-29
1.165-29


APPENDIX D
APPENDIX D  
          GEOLOGICAL, SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATIONS
GEOLOGICAL, SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATIONS  
                                TO CHARACTERIZE SEISMIC SOURCES
TO CHARACTERIZE SEISMIC SOURCES
                                                                                                                        1%
D.W
D.
INTRODUCTION
As characterized for use in probabilistic seismic hazard analyses (PSHA), seismic sources are zones within which future earthquakes are likely to occur at the same recurrence rates. Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations provide the information needed to identify and characterize source parameters, such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake recurrence rates and maximum magnitudes. The amount of data available about earthquakes and their causative sources varies substantially between the Western United States (west of the Rocky Mountain front) and the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS), or stable continental region (SCR) (east of the Rocky Mountain front). Furthermore, there are varia tions in the amount and quality of data within these regions.
 
In active tectonic regions there are both capable tectonic sources and seismogenic sources, and be cause of their relatively high activity rate they may be more readily identified. In the CEUS, identifying seismic sources is less certain because of the difficul ty in correlating earthquake activity with known tec tonic structures, the lack of adequate knowledge about earthquake causes, and the relatively lower ac tivity rate. However, several significant tectonic structures exist and some of these have been inter preted as potential seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers fault). 
In the CEUS there is no single recommended pro cedure to follow to characterize maximum magni tudes associated with such candidate seismogenic sources; therefore, it is most likely that the deter mination of the properties of the seismogenic source, whether it is a tectonic structure or a seismotectonic province, will be inferred rather than demonstrated by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data. Moreover, it is not generally known what rela tionships exist between observed tectonic structures in a seismic source within the CEUS and the current earthquake activity that may be associated with that source. Generally, the observed tectonic structure re sulted from ancient tectonic forces that are no longer present. The historical seismicity record, the results of regional and site studies, and judgment play key roles. If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismic ity and seismic sources, approaches used for more ac tive tectonic regions can be applied.
 
The primary objective of geological, seismologi cal, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up to-date, site-specific earth science data base that sup plements existing information (Ref. D.1). In the CEUS
the results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent with the information used as the basis for ac cepted probabilistic seismic hazard studies. If the new data are consistent with the existing earth science data base, modification of the hazard analysis is not required. For sites in the CEUS where there is signifi cant new information (see Appendix E) provided by the site investigation, and for sites in the Western United States, site-specific seismic sources are to be de termined. It is anticipated that for most sites in the CEUS, new information will have been adequately bounded by existing seismic source interpretations.
 
The following is a general list of characteristics to be evaluated for a seismic source for site-specific source interpretations:
"*
Source zone geometry (location and extent, both surface and subsurface),
"*
Historical and instrumental seismicity associated with each source,
"*
Paleoseismicity,
*
Relationship of the potential seismic source to other potential seismic sources in the region,
"*
Seismic potential of the seismic source, based on the source's known characteristics, including seismicity,
"*
Recurrence model (frequency of earthquake oc currence versus magnitude),
"*
Other factors that will be evaluated, depending on the geologic setting of a site, such as:
* Quaternary (last 2 million years) displace ments (sense of slip on faults, fault length and width, area of the fault plane, age of displace ments, estimated displacement per event, es timated magnitude per offset, segmentation, orientations of regional tectonic stresses with
1.165-30
1%
 
respect to faults, and displacement history or uplift rates of seismogenic folds),
* The late Quaternary interaction between faults that compose a fault system and the
-'
interaction between fault systems.
 
* Effects of human activities such as withdraw al of fluid from or addition of fluid to the subsurface, extraction of minerals, or the construction of dams and reservoirs,
*
Volcanism. Volcanic hazard is not addressed in this regulatory guide. It will be considered on a case-by-case basis in regions where a potential for this hazard exists.


==W. INTRODUCTION==
D.2. INVESTIGATIONS TO EVALUATE
roles. If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismic As characterized for use in probabilistic seismic ity and seismic sources, approaches used for more ac hazard analyses (PSHA), seismic sources are zones tive tectonic regions can be applied.
SEISMIC SOURCES
D.2.1 General Investigations of the site and region around the site are necessary to identify both seismogenic sources and capable tectonic sources and to determine their poten tial for generating earthquakes and causing surface de formation. If it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data to clearly justify the determination should be presented in the application for an early site permit, construction permit, operating license, or combined license. Gener ally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface within 40 km (25 miles) of the site will require detailed examination to determine its significance. Potentially active tectonic deformation within the seismogenic zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geo physical and seismological methods to determine its significance.


within which future earthquakes are likely to occur at the same recurrence rates. Geological, seismological,           The primary objective of geological, seismologi and geophysical investigations provide the information      cal, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up needed to identify and characterize source parameters,      to-date, site-specific earth science data base that sup such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake      plements existing information (Ref. D.1). In the CEUS
Engineering solutions are generally available to mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes through design. However, engineering solutions can not always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitiga tion of the effects of permanent ground displacement phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsi dence, or ground collapse. For this reason, it is prudent to select an alternative site when the potential for per manent ground displacement exists at the proposed site (Ref. D.2).
recurrence rates and maximum magnitudes. The                the results of these investigations will also be used to amount of data available about earthquakes and their        assess whether new data and their interpretation are causative sources varies substantially between the          consistent with the information used as the basis for ac Western United States (west of the Rocky Mountain          cepted probabilistic seismic hazard studies. If the new front) and the Central and Eastern United States            data are consistent with the existing earth science data (CEUS), or stable continental region (SCR) (east of the    base, modification of the hazard analysis is not Rocky Mountain front). Furthermore, there are varia        required. For sites in the CEUS where there is signifi tions in the amount and quality of data within these        cant new information (see Appendix E) provided by the regions.                                                    site investigation, and for sites in the Western United States, site-specific seismic sources are to be de In active tectonic regions there are both capable      termined. It is anticipated that for most sites in the tectonic sources and seismogenic sources, and be            CEUS, new information will have been adequately cause of their relatively high activity rate they may be    bounded by existing seismic source interpretations.
In most of the CEUS, instrumentally located earth quakes seldom bear any relationship to geologic struc tures exposed at the ground surface. Possible geologi cally young fault displacements either do not extend to the ground surface or there is insufficient geologic ma terial of the appropriate age available to date the faults.


more readily identified. In the CEUS, identifying seismic sources is less certain because of the difficul          The following is a general list of characteristics to ty in correlating earthquake activity with known tec      be evaluated for a seismic source for site-specific tonic structures, the lack of adequate knowledge            source interpretations:
Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed at the ground surface in the Western United States as demon- strated by the buried (blind) reverse causative faults of the 1983 Coalinga,1988 Whittier Narrows, 1989 Loma Prieta, and 1994 Northridge earthquakes. These factors emphasize the need to conduct thorough investigations not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at seismogenic depths.
about earthquake causes, and the relatively lower ac        "*    Source zone geometry (location and extent, both tivity rate. However, several significant tectonic                surface and subsurface),
structures exist and some of these have been inter
                                                            "*    Historical and instrumental seismicity associated preted as potential seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers                    with each source, fault).                                                     "*    Paleoseismicity, In the CEUS there is no single recommended pro        *      Relationship of the potential seismic source to cedure to follow to characterize maximum magni                    other potential seismic sources in the region, tudes associated with such candidate seismogenic            "*    Seismic potential of the seismic source, based on sources; therefore, it is most likely that the deter              the source's known characteristics, including mination of the properties of the seismogenic source,              seismicity, whether it is a tectonic structure or a seismotectonic      "*    Recurrence model (frequency of earthquake oc province, will be inferred rather than demonstrated currence versus magnitude),
by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data. Moreover, it is not generally known what rela        "*      Other factors that will be evaluated, depending on tionships exist between observed tectonic structures              the geologic setting of a site, such as:
in a seismic source within the CEUS and the current                *  Quaternary (last 2 million years) displace earthquake activity that may be associated with that                  ments (sense of slip on faults, fault length and source. Generally, the observed tectonic structure re                  width, area of the fault plane, age of displace sulted from ancient tectonic forces that are no longer                ments, estimated displacement per event, es present. The historical seismicity record, the results                timated magnitude per offset, segmentation, of regional and site studies, and judgment play key                    orientations of regional tectonic stresses with
                                                    1.165-30


respect to faults, and displacement history or    strated by the buried (blind) reverse causative faults of uplift rates of seismogenic folds),                the 1983 Coalinga,1988 Whittier Narrows, 1989 Loma
The level of detail for investigations should be governed by knowledge of the current and late Quater nary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region. The investigations should be based on increasing the amount of detailed information as they proceed from the regional level down to the site area (e.g., 320 km to 8 km distance from the site). 
          *    The late Quaternary interaction between            Prieta, and 1994 Northridge earthquakes. These factors faults that compose a fault system and the         emphasize the need to conduct thorough investigations
Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the in vestigations described below to determine whether or not they are capable tectonic sources.
-'            interaction between fault systems.                not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at seismogenic depths.


*  Effects of human activities such as withdraw al of fluid from or addition of fluid to the            The level of detail for investigations should be subsurface, extraction of minerals, or the        governed by knowledge of the current and late Quater construction of dams and reservoirs,               nary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region. The investigations should be based
The investigations for determining seismic sources should be carried out at three levels, with areas de scribedby radii of 320 km (200 mi), 40 km (25 mi), and  
          *  Volcanism. Volcanic hazard is not addressed on increasing the amount of detailed information as in this regulatory guide. It will be considered on a case-by-case basis in regions where a        they proceed from the regional level down to the site area (e.g., 320 km to 8 km distance from the site).
8 km (5 mi) from the site. The level of detail increases closer to the site. The specific site, to a distance of at least 1 km (0.6 mi), should be investigated in more de tail than the other levels.
              potential for this hazard exists.


Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a D.2. INVESTIGATIONS TO EVALUATE                                site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop or SEISMIC SOURCES                                        excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the in vestigations described below to determine whether or D.2.1    General not they are capable tectonic sources.
The regional investigations [within a radius of 320
*km (200 mi) of the site] should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe the Quaternary tectonic regime. The data should be presented at a scale of
1:500,000 or smaller. The investigations are not ex pected to be extensive or in detail, but should include a comprehensive literature review supplemented by fo cused geological reconnaissances based on the results of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and airphotos). Some detailed investigations at specific locations within the region may be necessary if potential capable tectonic sources, or seismogenic sources that may be significant for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground motion, are identified.


Investigations of the site and region around the site          The investigations for determining seismic sources are necessary to identify both seismogenic sources and        should be carried out at three levels, with areas de capable tectonic sources and to determine their poten          scribedby radii of 320 km (200 mi), 40 km (25 mi), and tial for generating earthquakes and causing surface de          8 km (5 mi) from the site. The level of detail increases formation. If it is determined that surface deformation        closer to the site. The specific site, to a distance of at need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data    least 1 km (0.6 mi), should be investigated in more de to clearly justify the determination should be presented      tail than the other levels.
The large size of the area for the regional investiga tions is recommended because of the possibility that all significant seismic sources, or alternative configura tions, may not have been enveloped by the LLNL/EPRI
data base. Thus, it will increase the chances of (1) iden tifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that might extend close enough for earthquake ground mo tions generated by that source to affect the site and (2)  
confirming the PSHA's data base. Furthermore, be cause of the relatively aseismic nature of the CEUS, the area should be large enough to include as many historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for
1.165-31
1 11
'i t


in the application for an early site permit, construction The regional investigations [within a radius of 320
analysis as reasonably possible. The specified area of study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any previously identified sources that could be analogous to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the site. In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it has often been necessary, because of the absence of dat able horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investiga tions out many tens or hundreds of kilometers from the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous struc ture in order to locate overlying datable strata or uncon formities so that geochronological methods could be applied. This procedure has also been used to estimate the age of an undatable seismic source in the site vicin ity by relating its time of last activity to that of a similar, previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic epi sode, the evidencý of which may be many tens or hundreds of miles away.
  permit, operating license, or combined license. Gener ally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface          *km(200 mi) of the site] should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe the Quaternary tectonic within 40 km (25 miles) of the site will require detailed regime. The data should be presented at a scale of examination to determine its significance. Potentially active tectonic deformation within the seismogenic
                                                                  1:500,000 or smaller. The investigations are not ex pected to be extensive or in detail, but should include a zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geo comprehensive literature review supplemented by fo physical and seismological methods to determine its cused geological reconnaissances based on the results significance.


of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, Engineering solutions are generally available to         aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and airphotos). Some mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes        detailed investigations at specific locations within the through design. However, engineering solutions can              region may be necessary if potential capable tectonic not always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitiga            sources, or seismogenic sources that may be significant tion of the effects of permanent ground displacement            for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsi            motion, are identified.
In the Western United States it is often necessary to extend the investigations to great distances (up to hundreds of kilometers) to characterize a major tectonic structure, such as the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault Zone and the Juan de Fuca Subduction Zone. On the other hand, in the Western United States it is not usually nec essary to extend the regional investigations that far in all directions. For example, for a site such as Diablo Canyon, which is near the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault, it would not be necessary to extend the regional inves tigations farther east than the dominant San Andreas Fault, which is about 75 km (45 mi) from the site; nor west beyond the Santa Lucia Banks Fault, which is about 45 km (27 mi). Justification for using lesser dis tances should be provided.


dence, or ground collapse. For this reason, it is prudent            The large size of the area for the regional investiga to select an alternative site when the potential for per        tions is recommended because of the possibility that all manent ground displacement exists at the proposed site          significant seismic sources, or alternative configura (Ref. D.2).                                                    tions, may not have been enveloped by the LLNL/EPRI
Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may need to be supplemented at specific -locations by more detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geo physical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be conducted to a distance of 40 km (25 mi) from the site;
        In most of the CEUS, instrumentally located earth        data base. Thus, it will increase the chances of (1) iden quakes seldom bear any relationship to geologic struc          tifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that tures exposed at the ground surface. Possible geologi          might extend close enough for earthquake ground mo cally young fault displacements either do not extend to        tions generated by that source to affect the site and (2)
the data should be presented at a scale of 1:50,000 or smaller.
  the ground surface or there is insufficient geologic ma        confirming the PSHA's data base. Furthermore, be terial of the appropriate age available to date the faults.    cause of the relatively aseismic nature of the CEUS, the Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed at the          area should be large enough to include as many ground surface in the Western United States as demon-          historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for
                                                            1.165-31
                                                                                                  111        'i t


analysis as reasonably possible. The specified area of            rates of historical seismic activity (felt or instrumen study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any          tally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capa previously identified sources that could be analogous            ble tectonic source such as a fault zone.
Detailed investigations should be carried out with in a radius of 8 km (5 mi) from the site, and the resulting data should be presented at a scale of 1:5,000 or smaller.


to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the             Data from investigations at the site (approximately site. In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it      1 square kilometer) should be presented at a scale of      K
The level of investigations should be in sufficient detail to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface. The inves tigations should use the methods described in subsec tions D.2.2 and D.2.3 that are appropriate for the tec tonic regime to characterize seismic sources.
has often been necessary, because of the absence of dat          1:500 or smaller. Important aspects of the site inves able horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investiga              tigations are the excavation and logging of exploratory tions out many tens or hundreds of kilometers from the            trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous struc          plant structures, particularly plant structures that are ture in order to locate overlying datable strata or uncon        characterized as Seismic Category I. In addition to geo formities so that geochronological methods could be              logical, geophysical, and seismological investigations, applied. This procedure has also been used to estimate            detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as de the age of an undatable seismic source in the site vicin          scribed in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3) should be ity by relating its time of last activity to that of a similar,  conducted at the site.


previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic epi sode, the evidencý of which may be many tens or                        The investigations needed to assess the Suitabil hundreds of miles away.                                          ity of the site with respect to effects of potential ground motions and surface deformation should in In the Western United States it is often necessary to      clude determination of (1) the lithologic, stratigraph extend the investigations to great distances (up to              ic, geomorphic, hydrologic, geotechnical, and struc hundreds of kilometers) to characterize a major tectonic          tural geologic characteristics of the site and the area structure, such as the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault Zone            surrounding the site, including its seismicity and and the Juan de Fuca Subduction Zone. On the other                geological history, (2) geological evidence of fault hand, in the Western United States it is not usually nec          offset or other distortion such as folding at or near essary to extend the regional investigations that far in          ground surface within the site area (8 km radius), and all directions. For example, for a site such as Diablo            (3) whether or not any faults or other tectonic struc Canyon, which is near the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault,              tures, any part of which are within a radius of 8 km (5 it would not be necessary to extend the regional inves            mi) from the site, are capable tectonic sources. This tigations farther east than the dominant San Andreas              information will be used to evaluate tectonic struc Fault, which is about 75 km (45 mi) from the site; nor            tures underlying the site area, whether buried or ex west beyond the Santa Lucia Banks Fault, which is                pressed at the surface, with regard to their potential about 45 km (27 mi). Justification for using lesser dis          for generating earthquakes and for causing surface tances should be provided.                                        deformation at or near the site. This partof the evalua Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may              tion should also consider the possible effects caused by human activities such as withdrawal of fluid from need to be supplemented at specific -locations by more or addition of fluid to the subsurface, extraction of detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geo minerals, or the loading effects of dams and reser physical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be voirs.
The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical and may cover larger areas than those described above in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high rates of historical seismic activity (felt or instrumen tally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capa ble tectonic source such as a fault zone.


conducted to a distance of 40 km (25 mi) from the site;
Data from investigations at the site (approximately
the data should be presented at a scale of 1:50,000 or           D.1.2    Reconnaissance Investigations, Literature smaller.                                                                   Review, and Other Sources of Preliminary Information Detailed investigations should be carried out with              Regional literature and reconnaissance-level in in a radius of 8 km (5 mi) from the site, and the resulting      vestigations can be planned based on reviews of avail data should be presented at a scale of 1:5,000 or smaller.        able documents and the results of previous investiga The level of investigations should be in sufficient detail        tions. Possible sources of information may include to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic          universities, consulting firms, and government agen deformation at or near the ground surface. The inves              cies. A detailed list of possible sources of information tigations should use the methods described in subsec              is given in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3).
1 square kilometer) should be presented at a scale of  
tions D.2.2 and D.2.3 that are appropriate for the tec D.2.3    Detailed Site Vicinity and Site Area tonic regime to characterize seismic sources.                              Investigations The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical                  The following methods are suggested but they are and may cover larger areas than those described above            not all-inclusive and investigations should not be limit in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high        ed to them. Some procedures will not be applicable to
1:500 or smaller. Important aspects of the site inves tigations are the excavation and logging of exploratory trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the plant structures, particularly plant structures that are characterized as Seismic Category I. In addition to geo logical, geophysical, and seismological investigations, detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as de scribed in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3) should be conducted at the site.
                                                            1.165-32


every site, and situations will occur that require inves          D.2.3.1.5. Analysis of Quaternary sedimentary tigations that are not included in the following discus      deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault sion. It is anticipated that new technologies will be        zones, including (1) fault-related or fault-controlled de available in the future that will be applicable to these    posits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and collu investigations.                                             vial wedges formed by the erosion of a fault paleoscarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as al D.2.3.1  Surface Investigations                        luvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shore line deposits.
The investigations needed to assess the Suitabil ity of the site with respect to effects of potential ground motions and surface deformation should in clude determination of (1) the lithologic, stratigraph ic, geomorphic, hydrologic, geotechnical, and struc tural geologic characteristics of the site and the area surrounding the site, including its seismicity and geological history, (2) geological evidence of fault offset or other distortion such as folding at or near ground surface within the site area (8 km radius), and
(3) whether or not any faults or other tectonic struc tures, any part of which are within a radius of 8 km (5 mi) from the site, are capable tectonic sources. This information will be used to evaluate tectonic struc tures underlying the site area, whether buried or ex pressed at the surface, with regard to their potential for generating earthquakes and for causing surface deformation at or near the site. This partof the evalua tion should also consider the possible effects caused by human activities such as withdrawal of fluid from or addition of fluid to the subsurface, extraction of minerals, or the loading effects of dams and reser voirs.


Surface exploration needed to assess the neotec tonic regime and the geology of the area around the site          D.2.3.1.6. Identification and analysis of de is dependent on the site location and may be carried out    formation features caused by vibratory ground mo with the use of any appropriate combination of the geo      tions, including seismically induced liquefaction fea logical, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical        tures (sand boils, explosion craters, lateral spreads, engineering techniques summarized in the following          settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, paragraphs and Ref. D.3. However, not all of these          rockfalls, deformed lake deposits or soil horizons, methods must be carried out at a given site.                 shear zones, cracks or fissures (Refs. D.13 and D.14).
D.1.2 Reconnaissance Investigations, Literature Review, and Other Sources of Preliminary Information Regional literature and reconnaissance-level in vestigations can be planned based on reviews of avail able documents and the results of previous investiga tions. Possible sources of information may include universities, consulting firms, and government agen cies. A detailed list of possible sources of information is given in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3).
    D.2.3.1.1. Geological interpretations of aerial              D.2.3.1.7. Analysis of fault displacements, such photographs and other remote-sensing imagery, as ap          as by the interpretion of the morphology of topographic propriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in  fault scarps associated with or produced by surface rup identifying rock outcrops, faults and other tectonic fea    ture. Fault scarp morphology is useful in estimating the tures, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments,      age of last displacement (in conjunction with the ap soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil          propriate geochronological methods described in Sub section D.2.4, approximate size of the earthquake, re liquefaction.
D.2.3 Detailed Site Vicinity and Site Area Investigations The following methods are suggested but they are not all-inclusive and investigations should not be limit ed to them. Some procedures will not be applicable to
1.165-32 K


currence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the D.2.3.1.2. Mapping of topographic, geologic,            causative fault at depth (Refs. D.15 through D.18).
every site, and situations will occur that require inves tigations that are not included in the following discus sion. It is anticipated that new technologies will be available in the future that will be applicable to these investigations.
geomorphic, and hydrologic features at scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis, stratigraphy            D.2.3.2    Seismological Investigations (particularly Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic fea                D.2.3.2.1. Listing of all historically reported tures. For offshore sites, coastal sites, or sites located  earthquakes having Modified Mercalli Intensity near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geo          (MMI) greater than or equal to IV or magnitude greater morphology (particularly mapping marine and fluvial          than or equal to 3.0 that can reasonably be associated terraces), bathymetry, geophysics (such as seismic re        with seismic sources, any part of which is within a ra flection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent need      dius of 320 km (200 miles) of the site (the site region).
ed for evaluation.                                          The earthquake descriptions should include the date of occurrence and measured or estimated data on the high D.2.3.1.3. Identification and evaluation of verti      est intensity, magnitude, epicenter, depth, focal mecha cal crustal movements by (1) geodetic land surveying        nism, and stress drop. Historical seismicity includes to identify and measure short-term crustal movements        both historically reported and instrumentally recorded (Refs. D.4 and D.5) and (2) geological analyses such as      data. For earthquakes without instrumentally recorded analysis of regional dissection and degradation pat          data or calculated magnitudes, intensity should be con terns, marine and lacustrine terraces and shorelines,        verted to magnitude, the procedure used to convert it to fluvial adjustments such as changes in stream longitu        magnitude should be clearly documented, and epicen dinal profiles or terraces, and other long-term changes      ters should be determined based on intensity distribu such as elevation changes across lava flows (Ref. D.6).      tions. Methods to convert intensity values to magni tudes in the CEUS are described in References D.1 and D.2.3.1.4. Analysis of offset, displaced, or D.19 through D.21.


anomalous landforms such as displaced stream chan nels or changes in stream profiles or the upstream               D.2.3.2.2. Seismic monitoring in the site area migration of knickpoints (Refs. D.7 through D.12);          should be established as soon as possible after site abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes      selection. For sites in both the CEUS and WUS, a in paleochannels across a fault (Refs. D.11 and D.12);      single large dyn amic range, broad-band seismograph, or uplifted, downdropped, or laterally displaced marine      and a network of short period instruments to locate terraces (Ref. D.12).                                        events should be deployed around the site area.
D.2.3.1 Surface Investigations Surface exploration needed to assess the neotec tonic regime and the geology of the area around the site is dependent on the site location and may be carried out with the use of any appropriate combination of the geo logical, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical engineering techniques summarized in the following paragraphs and Ref. D.3. However, not all of these methods must be carried out at a given site.
 
D.2.3.1.1.
 
Geological interpretations of aerial photographs and other remote-sensing imagery, as ap propriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in identifying rock outcrops, faults and other tectonic fea tures, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments, soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil liquefaction.
 
D.2.3.1.2.
 
Mapping of topographic, geologic, geomorphic, and hydrologic features at scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis, stratigraphy (particularly Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic fea tures. For offshore sites, coastal sites, or sites located near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geo morphology (particularly mapping marine and fluvial terraces), bathymetry, geophysics (such as seismic re flection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent need ed for evaluation.
 
D.2.3.1.3.
 
Identification and evaluation of verti cal crustal movements by (1) geodetic land surveying to identify and measure short-term crustal movements (Refs. D.4 and D.5) and (2) geological analyses such as analysis of regional dissection and degradation pat terns, marine and lacustrine terraces and shorelines, fluvial adjustments such as changes in stream longitu dinal profiles or terraces, and other long-term changes such as elevation changes across lava flows (Ref. D.6). 
D.2.3.1.4.
 
Analysis of offset, displaced, or anomalous landforms such as displaced stream chan nels or changes in stream profiles or the upstream migration of knickpoints (Refs. D.7 through D.12);
abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes in paleochannels across a fault (Refs. D.11 and D.12);
or uplifted, downdropped, or laterally displaced marine terraces (Ref. D.12).
D.2.3.1.5.
 
Analysis of Quaternary sedimentary deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault zones, including (1) fault-related or fault-controlled de posits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and collu vial wedges formed by the erosion of a fault paleoscarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as al luvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shore line deposits.
 
D.2.3.1.6.
 
Identification and analysis of de formation features caused by vibratory ground mo tions, including seismically induced liquefaction fea tures (sand boils, explosion craters, lateral spreads, settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, rockfalls, deformed lake deposits or soil horizons, shear zones, cracks or fissures (Refs. D.13 and D.14). 
D.2.3.1.7.
 
Analysis of fault displacements, such as by the interpretion of the morphology of topographic fault scarps associated with or produced by surface rup ture. Fault scarp morphology is useful in estimating the age of last displacement (in conjunction with the ap propriate geochronological methods described in Sub section D.2.4, approximate size of the earthquake, re currence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the c ausative fault at depth (Refs. D.15 through D.18). 
D.2.3.2 Seismological Investigations D.2.3.2.1.
 
Listing of all historically reported earthquakes having Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI) greater than or equal to IV or magnitude greater than or equal to 3.0 that can reasonably be associated with seismic sources, any part of which is within a ra dius of 320 km (200 miles) of the site (the site region)
The earthquake descriptions should include the date of occurrence and measured or estimated data on the high est intensity, magnitude, epicenter, depth, focal mecha nism, and stress drop. Historical seismicity includes both historically reported and instrumentally recorded data. For earthquakes without instrumentally recorded data or calculated magnitudes, intensity should be con verted to magnitude, the procedure used to convert it to magnitude should be clearly documented, and epicen ters should be determined based on intensity distribu tions. Methods to convert intensity values to magni tudes in the CEUS are described in References D.1 and D.19 through D.21.
 
D.2.3.2.2.
 
Seismic monitoring in the site area should be established as soon as possible after site selection. For sites in both the CEUS and WUS, a single large dyn amic range, broad-band seismograph, and a network of short period instruments to locate events should be deployed around the site area.


1.165-33
1.165-33


The data obtained by monitoring current seismic         tailed discussion of each of these methods and their ity will be used, along with the much larger data base       application to nuclear power plant siting is presented in acquired from site investigations, to evaluate site re       a document that is currently under preparation and will sponse and to provide information about whether there       be published as a NUREG.1 are significant sources of earthquakes within the site vicinity, or to provide data by which an existing source   D.2.4.1          Sidereal Dating Methods can be characterized.                                                   0    Dendrochronology Monitoring should be initiated as soon as practica                 0    Varve chronology ble at the site, preferably at least five years prior to                 0    Schlerochronology construction of a nuclear unit at a site, and should con tinue at least until the free field seismic monitoring       D.2.4.2          Isotopic Dating Methods strong ground motion instrumentation described in                       0    Radiocarbon Regulatory Guide 1.12 (Ref. D.22) is operational.
The data obtained by monitoring current seismic ity will be used, along with the much larger data base acquired from site investigations, to evaluate site re sponse and to provide information about whether there are significant sources of earthquakes within the site vicinity, or to provide data by which an existing source can be characterized.
 
Monitoring should be initiated as soon as practica ble at the site, preferably at least five years prior to construction of a nuclear unit at a site, and should con tinue at least until the free field seismic monitoring strong ground motion instrumentation described in Regulatory Guide 1.12 (Ref. D.22) is operational.
 
D.2.33 Subsurface Investigations Ref. D.3 describes geological, geotechnical, and geophysical investigation techniques that can be ap plied to explore the subsurface beneath the site and in the region around the site, therefore, only a brief sum mary is provided in this section. Subsurface investiga tions in the site area and vicinity to identify and define seismogenic sources and capable tectonic sources may'
include the following.
 
D.2.3.3.1.


S    Cosmogenic nuclides              -M3 6    , 1OBe, 2 1pb, and 26A1 D.2.33      Subsurface Investigations
Geophysical investigations that have been useful in the past include, for example, magnetic and gravity surveys, seismic reflection and seismic re fraction surveys, borehole geophysics, electrical sur veys, and ground-penetrating radar surveys.
                                                                          0    Potassium argon and argon-39-argon-40
      Ref. D.3 describes geological, geotechnical, and
                                                                          0    Uranium series - 234 U-23°'h and 235U
geophysical investigation techniques that can be ap                          231Pa plied to explore the subsurface beneath the site and in                      2 10
                                                                          0        Lead the region around the site, therefore, only a brief sum mary is provided in this section. Subsurface investiga                  0    Uranium-lead, thorium-lead tions in the site area and vicinity to identify and define D+/-4.4            Radiogenic Dating Methods seismogenic sources and capable tectonic sources may'
include the following.                                                  S    Fission track D.2.3.3.1.    Geophysical investigations that have                 0    Luminescence (TL and OSL)
been useful in the past include, for example, magnetic                   0    Electron spin resonance (ESR)
and gravity surveys, seismic reflection and seismic re       D.2.4.5          Chemical and Biological Dating fraction surveys, borehole geophysics, electrical sur                         Methods veys, and ground-penetrating radar surveys.


0    Amino acid racemization D.2.33.2.      Core borings to map subsurface geol                      Obsidian and tephra hydration
D.2.33.2.
                                                                        0
ogy and obtain samples for testing such as determining
                                                                        0    Lichenometry the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geo chronological analysis.                                      D.2.4.6        Geomorphic Dating Methods D.2.3.3.3. Excavating and logging of trenches                      S    Soil profile development across geological features as part of the neotectonic in                0    Rock and mineral weathering vestigation and to obtain samples for the geochrono
                                                                        0    Scarp morphology logical analysis of those features.


At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil,      D.2.4.7        Correlation Dating Methods bodies of water, or other material may obscure geologic               
Core borings to map subsurface geol ogy and obtain samples for testing such as determining the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geo chronological analysis.
* Paleomagnetism (secular variation and re evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure. In                      versal stratigraphy)
such cases, the analysis of evidence elsewhere along the              
* Tephrochronology structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in                0    Paleontology (marine and terrestrial)
the vicinity of the site (Refs. D.12 and D.23).
                                                                        S    Global climatic correlations - Quaternary D.2.4      Geochronology                                                deposits and landforms, marine stable iso tope records, etc.


An important part of the geologic investigations to identify and define potential seismic sources is the geo chronology of geologic materials. An acceptable clas          1 NUREG/CR-5562, "Quaternary Geochronology: Applications in Qua.
D.2.3.3.3.


sification of dating methods is based on the rationale          ternary Geology and Paleoseismology," Editors H.S. Noller, LM. Sow.
Excavating and logging of trenches across geological features as part of the neotectonic in vestigation and to obtain samples for the geochrono logical analysis of those features.


described in Reference D.24. The following tech                 era, and W.R. Lettis, will be published in the spring of 1997. Copies will be available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public K
At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil, bodies of water, or other material may obscure geologic evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure. In such cases, the analysis of evidence elsewhere along the structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in the vicinity of the site (Refs. D.12 and D.23). 
niques, which are presented according to that classifi         Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington. DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone cation, are useful in dating Quaternary deposits. A de-         (202)634-3273; fax (202)53-41-3343.
D.2.4 Geochronology An important part of the geologic investigations to identify and define potential seismic sources is the geo chronology of geologic materials. An acceptable clas sification of dating methods is based on the rationale described in Reference D.24. The following tech niques, which are presented according to that classifi cation, are useful in dating Quaternary deposits. A de- tailed discussion of each of these methods and their application to nuclear power plant siting is presented in a document that is currently under preparation and will be published as a NUREG.1 D.2.4.1
0
0
0
D.2.4.2
0
S
0
0
0
0
D+/-4.4 S
0
0
Sidereal Dating Methods Dendrochronology Varve chronology Schlerochronology Isotopic Dating Methods Radiocarbon Cosmogenic nuclides -M36
, 1OBe, 21pb, and 26A1 Potassium argon and argon-39-argon-40
Uranium series - 234U-23°'h and 235U
231Pa
2 10Lead Uranium-lead, thorium-lead Radiogenic Dating Methods Fission track Luminescence (TL and OSL)  
Electron spin resonance (ESR)
D.2.4.5 Chemical and Biological Dating Methods
0
0
0
D.2.4.6 S
0
0
Amino acid racemization Obsidian and tephra hydration Lichenometry Geomorphic Dating Methods Soil profile development Rock and mineral weathering Scarp morphology D.2.4.7 Correlation Dating Methods
* Paleomagnetism (secular variation and re versal stratigraphy)
*
Tephrochronology
0
S
Paleontology (marine and terrestrial)  
Global climatic correlations - Quaternary deposits and landforms, marine stable iso tope records, etc.


1NUREG/CR-5562, "Quaternary Geochronology: Applications in Qua.
ternary Geology and Paleoseismology," Editors H.S. Noller, LM. Sow.
era, and W.R. Lettis, will be published in the spring of 1997. Copies will be available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington. DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone
(202)634-3273; fax (202)53-41-3343.
K
1.165-34
1.165-34


In the CEUS, it may not be possible to reasonably         in karst terrain; and growth faulting, such as occurs in demonstrate the age of last activity of a tectonic struc       the Gulf Coastal Plain or in other deep soil regions sub ture. In such cases the NRC staff will accept association     ject to extensive subsurface fluid withdrawal.
In the CEUS, it may not be possible to reasonably demonstrate the age of last activity of a tectonic struc ture. In such cases the NRC staff will accept association of such structures with geologic structural features or tectonic processes that are geologically old (at least pre Quaternary) as an age indicator in the absence of con flicting evidence.
 
These investigative procedures should also be ap plied, where possible, to characterize offshore struc tures (faults or fault zones, and folds, uplift, or subsi dence related to faulting at depth) for coastal sites or those sites located adjacent to landlocked bodies of water. Investigations of offshore structures will rely heavily on seismicity, geophysics, and bathymetry rather than conventional geologic mapping methods that normally can be used effectively onshore. Howev er, it is often useful to investigate similar features on shore to learn more about the significant offshore fea tures.


of such structures with geologic structural features or              Glacially induced faults generally do not represent tectonic processes that are geologically old (at least pre      a deep-seated seismic or fault displacement hazard be Quaternary) as an age indicator in the absence of con          cause the conditions that created them are no longer flicting evidence.
D.2.5 Distinction Between Tectonic and Nontectonic Deformation At a site, both nontectonic deformation and tecton ic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to nuclear power plants, but there are likely to be differences in the approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two
-"
types of phenomena. Therefore, nontectonic deforma tion should be distinguished from tectonic deformation at a site. In past nuclear power plant licensing activities, surface displacements caused by phenomena other than tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectoni cally induced faulting. Such features include faults on which the last displacement was induced by glaciation or deglaciation; collapse structures, such as found in karst terrain; and growth faulting, such as occurs in the Gulf Coastal Plain or in other deep soil regions sub ject to extensive subsurface fluid withdrawal.


present. However, residual stresses from Pleistocene These investigative procedures should also be ap          glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, al plied, where possible, to characterize offshore struc          though they are of less concern than active tectonically tures (faults or fault zones, and folds, uplift, or subsi      induced stresses. These features should be investigated dence related to faulting at depth) for coastal sites or        with respect to their relationship to current in situ those sites located adjacent to landlocked bodies of            stresses.
Glacially induced faults generally do not represent a deep-seated seismic or fault displacement hazard be cause the conditions that created them are no longer present. However, residual stresses from Pleistocene glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, al though they are of less concern than active tectonically induced stresses. These features should be investigated with respect to their relationship to current in situ stresses.


water. Investigations of offshore structures will rely              The nature of faults related to collapse features can heavily on seismicity, geophysics, and bathymetry              usually be defined through geotechnical investigations rather than conventional geologic mapping methods              and can either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engi that normally can be used effectively onshore. Howev            neering fixes can be provided.
The nature of faults related to collapse features can usually be defined through geotechnical investigations and can either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engi neering fixes can be provided.


er, it is often useful to investigate similar features on Large, naturally occurring growth faults as found shore to learn more about the significant offshore fea tures.                                                          in the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most D.2.5      Distinction Between Tectonic and                    likely occurs at a much less rapid rate than that of tec Nontectonic Deformation                            "tonicfaults. They are not regarded as having the capac At a site, both nontectonic deformation and tecton        ity to generate damaging vibratory ground motion, can ic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to nuclear        often be identified and avoided in siting, and their dis power plants, but there are likely to be differences in the    placements can be monitored. Some growth faults and approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two        antithetic faults related to growth faults are not easily
Large, naturally occurring growth faults as found in the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most likely occurs at a much less rapid rate than that of tec
-" types of phenomena. Therefore, nontectonic deforma              identified; therefore, investigations described above tion should be distinguished from tectonic deformation        with respect to capable faults and fault zones should be at a site. In past nuclear power plant licensing activities,    applied in regions where growth faults are known to be surface displacements caused by phenomena other than          present. Local human-induced growth faulting can be tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectoni              monitored and controlled or avoided.
"tonic faults. They are not regarded as having the capac ity to generate damaging vibratory ground motion, can often be identified and avoided in siting, and their dis placements can be monitored. Some growth faults and antithetic faults related to growth faults are not easily identified; therefore, investigations described above with respect to capable faults and fault zones should be applied in regions where growth faults are known to be present. Local human-induced growth faulting can be monitored and controlled or avoided.


cally induced faulting. Such features include faults on          . If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to which the last displacement was induced by glaciation          be of nontectonic origin, they should be treated as tec or deglaciation; collapse structures, such as found            tonic deformation.
.
If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to be of nontectonic origin, they should be treated as tec tonic deformation.


1.165-35 I II         f I
1.165-35 I II  
f I


REFERENCES
REFERENCES
D.1 Electric Power Research Institute, "Seismic Haz                                   Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 94,                       K
D.1 Electric Power Research Institute, "Seismic Haz ard Methodology for the Central and Eastern United States," EPRI NP-4726,, All Volumes,
        ard Methodology for the Central and Eastern                                    pp. 603-623, 1989.
1988 through.1991, D.2 International Atomic Energy Agency, "Earth quakes and Associated Topics in Relation to Nu clear Power Plant Siting,"
Safety Series No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.
 
D.3 USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants,"
Regulatory Guide
1.132.1 D.4 R. Reilinger, M. Bevis, and G. Jurkowski, "Tilt from Releveling: An Overview of the U.S. Data Base," Tectonophysics, Volume 107, pp. 315
330, 1984.
 
D.5 R.K. Mark et al., "An Assessment of the Accura cy of the Geodetic Measurements that Led to the Recognition of the'Southern California Uplift,"
Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 86, pp. 2783-2808, 1981.
 
D.6 T.K. Rockwell et al., "Chronology and Rates of Faulting of Ventura River Terraces, California,"
Geological Society ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume
95, pp. 1466-1474, 1984.


United States," EPRI NP-4726,, All Volumes,
D.7 K.E. Sieh, "Lateral Offsets and Revised Dates of Prehistoric Earthquakes at Pallett Creet, South ern California," Journal of Geophysical Re search, Volume 89, No. 89, pp. 7641-7670,  
        1988 through.1991,                                                    D.10 R.J. Weldon, III, and K.E. Sieh, "Holocene Rate of Slip and Tentative Recurrence Interval for D.2 International Atomic Energy Agency, "Earth                                        Large Earthquakes on the San Andreas Fault, Ca quakes and Associated Topics in Relation to Nu                                jon Pass, Southern California," GeologicalSoci clear Power Plant Siting," Safety Series                                      ety ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume 96, pp. 793-812, No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.                                                1985.
1984.


D.3 USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of                            D.11 F.H. Swan, III, D.P. Schwartz, and LS. Cluff, Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide                                        "Recurrence of Moderate to Large Magnitude
D.8 K.E. Sieh and R.H. Jahns, "Holocene Activity of the San Andreas Fault at Wallace Creek, Califor nia," Geological Society of America Bulletin, Volume 95, pp. 883-896, 1984.
        1.132.1                                                                        Earthquakes Produced by Surface Faulting on the Wasatch Fault Zone," Bulletin of the Seismologi D.4 R. Reilinger, M. Bevis, and G. Jurkowski, "Tilt                                    cal Society of America, Volume 70, pp, from Releveling: An Overview of the U.S. Data                                  1431-1462, 1980.


Base," Tectonophysics, Volume 107, pp. 315
D.9 K.E. Sieh, M. Stuiver, and D. Brillinger, "A More Precise Chronology of Earthquakes Produced by the San Andreas Fault in Southern California,"
        330, 1984.                                                            D.12 Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Pro D.5 R.K. Mark et al., "An Assessment of the Accura                                    gram; Diablo Canyon Power Plant;" Docket Nos.
ISingle copies of the regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,  
Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL,-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


cy of the Geodetic Measurements that Led to the                                50-275 and 50-323, 1988.2 Recognition of the'Southern California Uplift,"
Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 94, pp. 603-623, 1989.
        Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 86,                            D.13 S.F. Obermeier et al., "Geologic Evidence for Re pp. 2783-2808, 1981.                                                          current Moderate to Large Earthquakes Near Charleston, South Carolina," Science, Volume D.6 T.K. Rockwell et al., "Chronology and Rates of                                    227, pp. 408-411, 1985.


Faulting of Ventura River Terraces, California,"
D.10 R.J. Weldon, III, and K.E. Sieh, "Holocene Rate of Slip and Tentative Recurrence Interval for Large Earthquakes on the San Andreas Fault, Ca jon Pass, Southern California," Geological Soci ety ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume 96, pp. 793-812,  
        GeologicalSociety ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume                           D.14 D. Amick et al., "Paleoliquefaction Features Along the Atlantic Seaboard," U.S. Nuclear Reg
1985.
        95, pp. 1466-1474, 1984.


ulatory Commission, NUREG/CR-5613, Octo D.7 K.E. Sieh, "Lateral Offsets and Revised Dates of                                  ber 1990.3 Prehistoric Earthquakes at Pallett Creet, South D.15 R.E. Wallace, "Profiles and Ages of Young Fault ern California," Journal of Geophysical Re Scarps, North-Central Nevada," Geological So search, Volume 89, No. 89, pp. 7641-7670,
D.11 F.H. Swan, III, D.P. Schwartz, and LS. Cluff,  
                                                                                      ciety ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume 88, pp. 1267
"Recurrence of Moderate to Large Magnitude Earthquakes Produced by Surface Faulting on the Wasatch Fault Zone," Bulletin of the Seismologi cal Society of America, Volume 70, pp,  
        1984.
1431-1462, 1980.


D.12 Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Pro gram; Diablo Canyon Power Plant;" Docket Nos.
50-275 and 50-323, 1988.2 D.13 S.F. Obermeier et al., "Geologic Evidence for Re current Moderate to Large Earthquakes Near Charleston, South Carolina," Science, Volume
227, pp. 408-411, 1985.
D.14 D. Amick et al., "Paleoliquefaction Features Along the Atlantic Seaboard," U.S. Nuclear Reg ulatory Commission, NUREG/CR-5613, Octo ber 1990.3 D.15 R.E. Wallace, "Profiles and Ages of Young Fault Scarps, North-Central Nevada," Geological So ciety of America Bulletin, Volume 88, pp. 1267
1281, 1977.
1281, 1977.


D.8 K.E. Sieh and R.H. Jahns, "Holocene Activity of D.16 R.E. Wallace, "Discussion-Nomographs for the San Andreas Fault at Wallace Creek, Califor Estimating Components of Fault Displacement nia," Geological Society of America Bulletin, from Measured Height of Fault Scarp," Bulletin Volume 95, pp. 883-896, 1984.
D.16 R.E. Wallace, "Discussion-Nomographs for Estimating Components of Fault Displacement from Measured Height of Fault Scarp," Bulletin of the Association of Engineering Geologists, Volume 17, pp. 39-45, 1980.


of the Association of Engineering Geologists, D.9 K.E. Sieh, M. Stuiver, and D. Brillinger, "A More                                  Volume 17, pp. 39-45, 1980.
2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


Precise Chronology of Earthquakes Produced by                          2 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
3Copies are available for inspection or copying for It fee from the NRC  
        the San Andreas Fault in Southern California,"                            Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249; or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Roal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.


ISingle copies of the regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis      3Copies are available for inspection or copying for Itfee from the NRC
1,165-36 K
  tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or            Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying        PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,              phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL,-6, Wash              current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.                  Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249; or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Roal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.


1,165-36
D.17 R.E. Wallace, "Active Faults, Paleoseismology, and Earthquake Hazards: Earthquake Predic tion-An International Review," Maurice Ewing Series 4, American Geo1physical Union, pp.


D.17 R.E. Wallace, "Active Faults, Paleoseismology,            logical Society of America, Volume            67, and Earthquake Hazards: Earthquake Predic                pp. 599-614, 1977.
209-216, 1981.


tion-An International Review," Maurice Ewing Series 4, American Geo1physical Union, pp.          D.21 R.L. Street and A. Lacroix, "An Empirical Study
D.18 A.J. Crone and S.T. Harding, "Relationship of Late Quaternary Fault Scarps to Subjacent Faults, Eastern Great Basin, Utah," Geology, Vol ume 12, pp. 292-295, 1984.
    209-216, 1981.                                            of New England Seismicity," Bulletin of the Seis mological Society of America, Volume 69, pp.


D.18 A.J. Crone and S.T. Harding, "Relationship of            159-176, 1979.
D.19 O.W. Nuttli, "The Relation of Sustained Maxi mum Ground Acceleration and Velocity to Earth quake Intensity and Magnitude, State-of- the-Art for Assessing Earthquake Hazards in the Eastern United States," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Misc. Paper 5-73-1, Report 16, 1979.


Late Quaternary Fault Scarps to Subjacent Faults, Eastern Great Basin, Utah," Geology, Vol    D.22 USNRC, "Nuclear Power Plant Instrumentation ume 12, pp. 292-295, 1984.                               for Earthquakes," Regulatory Guide 1.12, Revi sion 2.1 D.19 O.W. Nuttli, "The Relation of Sustained Maxi mum Ground Acceleration and Velocity to Earth        D.23 H. Rood et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related quake Intensity and Magnitude, State-of- the-Art          to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Pow for Assessing Earthquake Hazards in the Eastern          er Plant, Units I and 2," USNRC, NUREG-0675, United States," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers              Supplement No. 34, June 1991.3 Misc. Paper 5-73-1, Report 16, 1979.
D.20 R.L. Street and F.T. Turcotte, "A Study of North eastern North America Spectral Moments, Mag nitudes and Intensities," Bulletin of the Seismo- logical Society of America, Volume
67, pp. 599-614, 1977.


D.24 S.M. Colman, K.L Pierce, and P.W. Birkeland, D.20 R.L. Street and F.T. Turcotte, "A Study of North          "Suggested Terminology for Quaternary Dating eastern North America Spectral Moments, Mag              Methods," QuaternaryResearch, Volume 288, nitudes and Intensities," Bulletin of the Seismo-        pp. 314-319, 1987.
D.21 R.L. Street and A. Lacroix, "An Empirical Study of New England Seismicity," Bulletin of the Seis mological Society of America, Volume 69, pp.
 
159-176, 1979.
 
D.22 USNRC, "Nuclear Power Plant Instrumentation for Earthquakes," Regulatory Guide 1.12, Revi sion 2.1 D.23 H. Rood et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Pow er Plant, Units I and 2," USNRC, NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, June 1991.3 D.24 S.M. Colman, K.L Pierce, and P.W. Birkeland,  
"Suggested Terminology for Quaternary Dating Methods," Quaternary Research, Volume 288, pp. 314-319, 1987.


1.165-37
1.165-37
                                                                                      1 1
1 1
 
APPENDIX E
PROCEDURE FOR THE EVALUATION OF NEW GEOSCIENCES INFORMATION
OBTAINED FROM THE SITE-SPECIFIC INVESTIGATIONS
E.1 INTRODUCTION
This appendix provides methods acceptable to the NRC staff for assessing the impact of new information obtained during site-specific investigations on the data base used for the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA). 
Regulatory Position 4 in this guide describes, ac ceptable PSHAs that were developed by Lawrence Liv ermore National Laboratories (LLNL) and the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) to characterize the seismic hazard for nuclear power plants and to develop the Safe Shutdown Earthquake ground motion (SSE). 
The procedure to determine the SSE outlined in this guide relies primarily on either the LLNL or EPRI
PSHA results for the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS). 
It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismo logical, and geophysical data obtained from the site specific investigations to demonstrate that these data are consistent with the PSHA data bases of these two methodologies. If new information identified by the site-specific investigations would result in a significant increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and this new information is validated by a strong technical basis, the PSHA may have to be modified to incorporate the new technical information. Using sensitivity studies, it may also be possible to justify a lower hazard estimate with an exceptionally strong technical basis. However, it is expected that large uncertainties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, and substantial delays in the licensing process will re sult from trying to justify a lower value with respect to a specific site.
 
In general, major recomputations of the LLNL and EPRI data base are planned periodically (approximate ly every ten years), or when there is an important new finding or occurrence. The overall revision of the data base will also require a reexamination of the reference probability discussed in Appendix B.
 
E.2 POSSIBLE SOURCES OF NEW
INFORMATION THAT COULD AFFECT
THE SSE
Types of new data that could affect the PSHA re sults can be put in three general categories: seismic sources, earthquake recurrence models or rates of de formation, and ground motion models.
 
E.2.1 Seismic Sources There are several possible sources of new informa tion from the site-specific investigations that could af fect the seismic hazard. Continued recording of small earthquakes, including microearthquakes, may indi cate the presence of a localized seismic source. Paleo seismic evidence, such as paleoliquefaction features or displaced Quaternary strata, may indicate the presence of a previously unknown tectonic structure or a larger amount of activity on a known structure than was pre viously considered. Geophysical studies (aeromagnet ic, gravity, and seismic reflection/refraction) may iden tify ckustal structures that suggest the presence of previously unknown seismic sources. In situ stress measurements and the mapping of tectonic structures in the future may indicate potential seismic sources.
 
Detailed local site investigations often reveal faults or other tectonic structures that were unknown, or re veal additional characteristics of known tectonic struc tures. Generally, based on past licensing experience in the CEUS, the discovery of such features will not re quire a modification of the seismic sources provided in the LLNL and EPRI studies. However, initial evidence regarding a newly discovered tectonic structure in the CEUS is often equivocal with respect to activity, and additional detailed investigations are required. By means of these detailed investigations, and based on past licensing activities, previously unidentified tec tonic structures can usually be shown to be inactive or otherwise insignificant to the seismic design basis of the facility, and a modification of the seismic sources provided by the LLNL and EPRI studies will not be re quired. On the other hand, if the newly discovered fea tures are relatively young, possibly associated with earthquakes that were large and could impact the haz ard for the proposed facility, a modification may be required.


APPENDIX E
Of particular concern is the possible existence of previously unknown, potentially active tectonic struc tures that could have moderately sized, but potentially damaging, near-field earthquakes or could cause sur face displacement. Also of concern is the presence of structures that could generate larger earthquakes within the region than previously estimated.
        PROCEDURE FOR THE EVALUATION OF NEW GEOSCIENCES INFORMATION
                    OBTAINED FROM THE SITE-SPECIFIC INVESTIGATIONS
E.1    INTRODUCTION                                          E.2.1    Seismic Sources This appendix provides methods acceptable to the             There are several possible sources of new informa NRC staff for assessing the impact of new information        tion from the site-specific investigations that could af obtained during site-specific investigations on the data    fect the seismic hazard. Continued recording of small base used for the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis      earthquakes, including microearthquakes, may indi (PSHA).                                                      cate the presence of a localized seismic source. Paleo seismic evidence, such as paleoliquefaction features or Regulatory Position 4 in this guide describes, ac displaced Quaternary strata, may indicate the presence ceptable PSHAs that were developed by Lawrence Liv of a previously unknown tectonic structure or a larger ermore National Laboratories (LLNL) and the Electric amount of activity on a known structure than was pre Power Research Institute (EPRI) to characterize the viously considered. Geophysical studies (aeromagnet seismic hazard for nuclear power plants and to develop the Safe Shutdown Earthquake ground motion (SSE).            ic, gravity, and seismic reflection/refraction) may iden The procedure to determine the SSE outlined in this          tify ckustal structures that suggest the presence of previously unknown seismic sources. In situ stress guide relies primarily on either the LLNL or EPRI
                                                              measurements and the mapping of tectonic structures in PSHA results for the Central and Eastern United States the future may indicate potential seismic sources.


(CEUS).
Investigations to determine whether there is a pos sibility for permanent ground displacement are espe-'
                                                                  Detailed local site investigations often reveal faults It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismo      or other tectonic structures that were unknown, or re logical, and geophysical data obtained from the site        veal additional characteristics of known tectonic struc specific investigations to demonstrate that these data        tures. Generally, based on past licensing experience in are consistent with the PSHA data bases of these two          the CEUS, the discovery of such features will not re methodologies. If new information identified by the          quire a modification of the seismic sources provided in site-specific investigations would result in a significant  the LLNL and EPRI studies. However, initial evidence increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and this new      regarding a newly discovered tectonic structure in the information is validated by a strong technical basis, the CEUS is often equivocal with respect to activity, and PSHA may have to be modified to incorporate the new additional detailed investigations are required. By technical information. Using sensitivity studies, it may    means of these detailed investigations, and based on also be possible to justify a lower hazard estimate with past licensing activities, previously unidentified tec an exceptionally strong technical basis. However, it is tonic structures can usually be shown to be inactive or expected that large uncertainties in estimating seismic otherwise insignificant to the seismic design basis of hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, the facility, and a modification of the seismic sources and substantial delays in the licensing process will re      provided by the LLNL and EPRI studies will not be re sult from trying to justify a lower value with respect to    quired. On the other hand, if the newly discovered fea a specific site.                                            tures are relatively young, possibly associated with In general, major recomputations of the LLNL and        earthquakes that were large and could impact the haz EPRI data base are planned periodically (approximate        ard for the proposed facility, a modification may be ly every ten years), or when there is an important new      required.
cially important in view of the provision to allow for a
1.165r38


finding or occurrence. The overall revision of the data            Of particular concern is the possible existence of base will also require a reexamination of the reference      previously unknown, potentially active tectonic struc probability discussed in Appendix B.                         tures that could have moderately sized, but potentially E.2 POSSIBLE SOURCES OF NEW                                  damaging, near-field earthquakes or could cause sur INFORMATION THAT COULD AFFECT                        face displacement. Also of concern is the presence of THE SSE                                              structures that could generate larger earthquakes within Types of new data that could affect the PSHA re        the region than previously estimated.
combined licensing procedure under 10 CFR Part 52 as an alternative to the two-step procedure of the past (Construction Permit and Operating License). In the
~j past at numerous nuclear power plant sites, potentially significant faults were identified when excavations were made during the construction phase prior to the is suance of an operating license, and extensive additional investigations of those faults had to be carried out to properly characterize them.


sults can be put in three general categories: seismic              Investigations to determine whether there is a pos sources, earthquake recurrence models or rates of de        sibility for permanent ground displacement are espe-'
E.2.2 Earthquake Recurrence Models There are three elements of the source zone's recur rence models that could be affected by new site-specific data: (1) the rate of occurrence of earthquakes, (2) their maximum magnitude, and (3) the form of the recur rence model, for example, a change from truncated ex ponential to a characteristic earthquake model. Among the new site-specific information that is most likely to have a significant impact on the hazard is the discovery of paleoseismic evidence such as extensive soil lique faction features, which would indicate with reasonable confidence that much larger estimates of the maximum earthquake than those predicted by the previous studies would ensue. The paleoseismic data could also be sig nificant even if the maximum magnitudes of the pre vious studies are consistent with the paleo-earthquakes if there are sufficient data to develop return period esti mates significantly shorter than those previously used in the probabilistic analysis. The paleoseismic data could also indicate that a characteristic earthquake model would be more applicable than a truncated expo nential model.
formation, and ground motion models.                        cially important in view of the provision to allow for a
                                                      1.165r38


combined licensing procedure under 10 CFR Part 52 as          EPRI or LLNL PSHA. Any of these cases could have an alternative to the two-step procedure of the past          an impact on the estimated maximum earthquake if the (Construction Permit and Operating License). In the          result is larger than the values provided by LLNL and
In the future, expanded earthquake catalogs will become available that will differ from the catalogs used by the previous studies. Generally, these new cata logues have been shown to have only minor impacts on estimates of the parameters of the recurrence models.
~j past at numerous nuclear power plant sites, potentially      EPRI.


significant faults were identified when excavations          E.2.3      Ground Motion Attenuation Models were made during the construction phase prior to the is Alternative ground motion models may be used to suance of an operating license, and extensive additional determine the site-specific spectral shape as discussed investigations of those faults had to be carried out to in Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix F of this regula properly characterize them.
Cases that might be significant include the discovery of records that indicate earthquakes in a region that had no seismic activity in the previous catalogs, the occur rence of an earthquake larger than the largest historic earthquakes, re-evaluating the largest historic earth quake to a significantly larger magnitude, or the occur rence of one or more moderate to large earthquakes (magnitude 5.0 or greater) in the CEUS.


tory guide. If the ground motion models used are a ma E.2.2    Earthquake Recurrence Models                        jor departure from the original models used in the haz ard analysis and are likely to have impacts on the hazard There are three elements of the source zone's recur      results of many sites, a reevaluation of the reference rence models that could be affected by new site-specific      probability may be needed using the procedure dis data: (1) the rate of occurrence of earthquakes, (2) their    cussed in Appendix B. Otherwise, a periodic (e.g.,
Geodetic measurements, particularly satellite
    maximum magnitude, and (3) the form of the recur              every ten years) reexamination of PSHA and the associ rence model, for example, a change from truncated ex          ated data base is considered appropriate to incorporate ponential to a characteristic earthquake model. Among          new understanding regarding ground motion models.
*based networks, may provide data and interpretations of rates and styles of deformation in the CEUS that can have implications for earthquake recurrence. New hy potheses regarding present-day tectonics based on new data or reinterpretation of old data may be developed that were not considered or given high weight in the EPRI or LLNL PSHA. Any of these cases could have an impact on the estimated maximum earthquake if the result is larger than the values provided by LLNL and EPRI.


the new site-specific information that is most likely to have a significant impact on the hazard is the discovery      E.3 PROCEDURE AND EVALUATION
E.2.3 Ground Motion Attenuation Models Alternative ground motion models may be used to determine the site-specific spectral shape as discussed in Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix F of this regula tory guide. If the ground motion models used are a ma jor departure from the original models used in the haz ard analysis and are likely to have impacts on the hazard results of many sites, a reevaluation of the reference probability may be needed using the procedure dis cussed in Appendix B. Otherwise, a periodic (e.g.,
    of paleoseismic evidence such as extensive soil lique              The EPRI and LLNL studies provide a wide range faction features, which would indicate with reasonable        of interpretations of the possible seismic sources for confidence that much larger estimates of the maximum          most regions of the CEUS, as well as a wide range of earthquake than those predicted by the previous studies      interpretations for all the key parameters of the seismic would ensue. The paleoseismic data could also be sig          hazard model. The first step in comparing the new in nificant even if the maximum magnitudes of the pre            formation with those interpretations is determining vious studies are consistent with the paleo-earthquakes      whether the new information is consistent with the fol if there are sufficient data to develop return period esti    lowing LLNL and EPRI parameters: (1) the range of mates significantly shorter than those previously used        seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity in the probabilistic analysis. The paleoseismic data          experts or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of could also indicate that a characteristic earthquake          seismicity rates for the region around the site as inter model would be more applicable than a truncated expo          preted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in nential model.                                               the studies, and (3) the range of maximum magnitudes In the future, expanded earthquake catalogs will          determined by the seismicity experts or teams. The new information is considered not significant and no further become available that will differ from the catalogs used evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the assump by the previous studies. Generally, these new cata logues have been shown to have only minor impacts on          tions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seis mic sources or seismic parameters are needed, or it sup estimates of the parameters of the recurrence models.
every ten years) reexamination of PSHA and the associ ated data base is considered appropriate to incorporate new understanding regarding ground motion models.


ports maintaining or decreasing the site median seismic Cases that might be significant include the discovery of hazard.
E.3 PROCEDURE AND EVALUATION
The EPRI and LLNL studies provide a wide range of interpretations of the possible seismic sources for most regions of the CEUS, as well as a wide range of interpretations for all the key parameters of the seismic hazard model. The first step in comparing the new in formation with those interpretations is determining whether the new information is consistent with the fol lowing LLNL and EPRI parameters: (1) the range of seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of seismicity rates for the region around the site as inter preted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the studies, and (3) the range of maximum magnitudes determined by the seismicity experts or teams. The new information is considered not significant and no further evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the assump tions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seis mic sources or seismic parameters are needed, or it sup ports maintaining or decreasing the site median seismic hazard.


records that indicate earthquakes in a region that had no seismic activity in the previous catalogs, the occur                An example is an additional nuclear unit sited near rence of an earthquake larger than the largest historic        an existing nuclear power plant site that was recently earthquakes, re-evaluating the largest historic earth          investigated by state-of-the-art geosciences techniques quake to a significantly larger magnitude, or the occur        and evaluated by current hazard methodologies. De rence of one or more moderate to large earthquakes            tailed geological, seismological, and geophysical site (magnitude 5.0 or greater) in the CEUS.                        specific investigations would be required to update ex isting information regarding the new site, but it is very Geodetic measurements, particularly satellite unlikely that significant new information would be
An example is an additional nuclear unit sited near an existing nuclear power plant site that was recently investigated by state-of-the-art geosciences techniques and evaluated by current hazard methodologies. De tailed geological, seismological, and geophysical site specific investigations would be required to update ex isting information regarding the new site, but it is very unlikely that significant new information would be found that would invalidate the previous PSHA.
  *basednetworks, may provide data and interpretations            found that would invalidate the previous PSHA.


of rates and styles of deformation in the CEUS that can have implications for earthquake recurrence. New hy                On the other hand, after evaluating the results of the potheses regarding present-day tectonics based on new          site-specific investigations, if there is still uncertainty data or reinterpretation of old data may be developed          about whether the new information will affect the esti that were not considered or given high weight in the          mated hazard, it will be necessary to evaluate the
On the other hand, after evaluating the results of the site-specific investigations, if there is still uncertainty about whether the new information will affect the esti mated hazard, it will be necessary to evaluate the
                                                            1.165-39 II
1.165-39 I I


potential impact of the new data and interpretations on       into the Wabash Valley. Several experts had given the median of the range of the input parameters. Such         strong weight to the relatively high seismicity of the new information may indicate the addition of a new             area, including the number of magnitude 5 historic seismic source, a change in the rate of activity, a change     earthquakes that have occurred, and thus had assumed in the spatial patterns of seismicity, an increase in the     the larger event. This analysis of the source character    K
potential impact of the new data and interpretations on the median of the range of the input parameters. Such new information may indicate the addition of a new seismic source, a change in the rate of activity, a change in the spatial patterns of seismicity, an increase in the rate of deformation, or the observation of a relationship between tectonic structures and current seismicity. The new findings should be assessed by comparing them with the specific input of each expert or team that par ticipated in the PSHA. Regarding a new source, for ex ample, the specific seismic source characterizations for each expert or team (such as tectonic feature being modeled, source geometry, probability of being active, maximum earthquake magnitude, or occurrence rates)
rate of deformation, or the observation of a relationship     izations of the experts and teams resulted in the conclu between tectonic structures and current seismicity. The       sion by the analysts that a new PSHA would not be nec new findings should be assessed by comparing them             essary for this region because an event similar to the with the specific input of each expert or team that par       prehistoric earthquake had been considered in the exist ticipated in the PSHA. Regarding a new source, for ex         ing PSHAs.
should be assessed in the context of the significant new data and interpretations.


ample, the specific seismic source characterizations for each expert or team (such as tectonic feature being                A third step would be required if the site-specific geosciences investigations revealed significant new in modeled, source geometry, probability of being active, formation that would substantially affect the estimated maximum earthquake magnitude, or occurrence rates)
It is expected that the new information will be with in the range of interpretations in the existing data base, and the data will not result in an increase in overall seis micity rate or increase in the range of maximum earth quakes to be used in the probabilistic analysis. It can then be concluded that the current LLNL or EPRI re sults apply. It is possible that the new data may necessi tate a change in some parameter. In this case, appropri ate sensitivity analyses should be performed to determine whether the new site-specific data could affect the ground motion estimates at the reference probability level.
should be assessed in the context of the significant new       hazard. Modification of the seismic sources would more than likely be required if the results of the detailed data and interpretations.


local and regional site investigations indicate that a pre It is expected that the new information will be with      viously unknown seismic source is identified in the vi in the range of interpretations in the existing data base,    cinity of the site. A hypothetical example would be the and the data will not result in an increase in overall seis    recognition of geological evidence of recent activity on micity rate or increase in the range of maximum earth          a fault near a nuclear power plant site in the stable conti quakes to be used in the probabilistic analysis. It can        nental region (SCR) similar to the evidence found on then be concluded that the current LLNL or EPRI re              the Meers Fault in Oklahoma (Ref, E.2). If such a sults apply. It is possible that the new data may necessi      source is identified, the same approach used in the ac tate a change in some parameter. In this case, appropri        tive tectonic regions of the Western United States ate sensitivity analyses should be performed to                should be used to assess the largest earthquake ex determine whether the new site-specific data could              pected and the rate of activity. If the resulting maximum affect the ground motion estimates at the reference            earthquake and the rate of activity are higher than those probability level.                                              provided by the LL.L or EPRI experts or teams regard ing seismic sources within the region in which this An example is a consideration of the seismic haz         newly discovered tectonic source is located, it may be ard near the Wabash River Valley (Ref. E.1). Geologi           necessary to modify the existing interpretations by cal evidence found recently within the Wabash River             introducing the new seismic source and developing Valley and several of its tributaries indicated that an       modified seismic hazard estimates for the site. The earthquake much larger than any historic event had oc         same would be true if the current ground motion mod curred several thousand years ago in the vicinity of Vin       els are a major departure from the original models.
An example is a consideration of the seismic haz ard near the Wabash River Valley (Ref. E.1). Geologi cal evidence found recently within the Wabash River Valley and several of its tributaries indicated that an earthquake much larger than any historic event had oc curred several thousand years ago in the vicinity of Vin cennes, Indiana. A review of the inputs by the experts and teams involved in the LLNL and EPRI PSHAs re vealed that many of them had made allowance for this possibility in their tectonic models by assuming the ex tension of the New Madrid Seismic Zone northward into the Wabash Valley. Several experts had given strong weight to the relatively high seismicity of the area, including the number of magnitude 5 historic earthquakes that have occurred, and thus had assumed the larger event. This analysis of the source character izations of the experts and teams resulted in the conclu sion by the analysts that a new PSHA would not be nec essary for this region because an event similar to the prehistoric earthquake had been considered in the exist ing PSHAs.


cennes, Indiana. A review of the inputs by the experts         These occurrences would likely require performing a and teams involved in the LLNL and EPRI PSHAs re              new PSHA using the updated data base, and may re vealed that many of them had made allowance for this          quire determining the appropriate reference probability possibility in their tectonic models by assuming the ex        in accordance with the procedure described in tension of the New Madrid Seismic Zone northward              Appendix B.
A third step would be required if the site-specific geosciences investigations revealed significant new in formation that would substantially affect the estimated hazard. Modification of the seismic sources would more than likely be required if the results of the detailed local and regional site investigations indicate that a pre viously unknown seismic source is identified in the vi cinity of the site. A hypothetical example would be the recognition of geological evidence of recent activity on a fault near a nuclear power plant site in the stable conti nental region (SCR) similar to the evidence found on the Meers Fault in Oklahoma (Ref, E.2). If such a source is identified, the same approach used in the ac tive tectonic regions of the Western United States should be used to assess the largest earthquake ex pected and the rate of activity. If the resulting maximum earthquake and the rate of activity are higher than those provided by the LL.L or EPRI experts or teams regard ing seismic sources within the region in which this newly discovered tectonic source is located, it may be necessary to modify the existing interpretations by introducing the new seismic source and developing modified seismic hazard estimates for the site. The same would be true if the current ground motion mod els are a major departure from the original models.
 
These occurrences would likely require performing a new PSHA using the updated data base, and may re quire determining the appropriate reference probability in accordance with the procedure described in Appendix B.


1.165-40
1.165-40
K


REFERENCES
REFERENCES
E.1 Memorandum from A. Murphy, NRC, to L.                                    E.2 A.R. Ramelli, D.B. Slemmons, and S.J. Bro Shao, NRC, Subject: Summary of a Public Me                     :et-          coum, "The Meers Fault: Tectonic Activity in ing on the Revision of Appendix A, "Seismic amd                              Southwestern Oklahoma," NUREG/CR-4852, Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear PoiVer                                  USNRC, March 1987.2 Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100; Enclosure (Vie On graphs): NUMARC, "Development and Demn stration of Industry's Integrated Seismic Sit ing
E.1 Memorandum from A. Murphy, NRC, to Shao, NRC, Subject: Summary of a Public Me ing on the Revision of Appendix A, "Seismic a Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear Poi Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100; Enclosure (Vie graphs): NUMARC, "Development and Demn stration of Industry's Integrated Seismic Sit Decision Process," February 23, 1993.1 lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NI
                                                                            2 Decision Process," February 23, 1993.1                                 Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC;  
                                                                              Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NIRC      current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the               Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; 1ele-        National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Pon phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.                                      Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.
PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; 1 phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
 
L.
 
E.2 A.R. Ramelli, D.B. Slemmons, and S.J. Bro
:et- coum, "The Meers Fault: Tectonic Activity in md Southwestern Oklahoma," NUREG/CR-4852, Ver USNRC, March 1987.2 On ing
2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC
Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at RC
current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, the Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the ele- National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Pon Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.


1.165-41
1.165-41
                                                                                                                  . I             t I
. I  
t I


APPENDIX F
APPENDIX F  
                                      PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE
PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE  
                        SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION
F.1 INTRODUCTION                                               scale it by a peak ground motion parameter (usually This appendix elaborates on Step 4 of Regulatory         peak ground acceleration (PGA)), which is derived Position 4 of this guide, which describes an acceptable       based on the size of the controlling earthquake. During procedure to determine the Safe Shutdown Earthquake           the licensing review this spectrum was checked against Ground Motion (SSE). The SSE is defined in terms of           site-specific spectral estimates derived using Standard the horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion re       Review Plan Section 2.5.2 procedures to be sure that sponse spectra at the free ground surface. It is devel         the SSE design spectrum adequately enveloped the oped with consideration of local site effects and site         site-specific spectrum. These past practices to define seismic wave transmission effects. The SSE response           the SSE are still valid and, based on this consideration, spectrum can be determined by scaling a site-specific         the following three possible situations are depicted in spectral shape determined for the controlling earth           Figures F.1 to F.3.
F.1 INTRODUCTION  
This appendix elaborates on Step 4 of Regulatory Position 4 of this guide, which describes an acceptable procedure to determine the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE). The SSE is defined in terms of the horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion re sponse spectra at the free ground surface. It is devel oped with consideration of local site effects and site seismic wave transmission effects. The SSE response spectrum can be determined by scaling a site-specific spectral shape determined for the controlling earth quakes or by scaling a standard broad-band spectral shape to envelope the average of the ground motion lev els for 5 and 10 Hz (Sa,5-10), and 1 and 2.5 Hz (Sa,1-2.5)
as determined in Step C.2 of Appendix C to this guide.


quakes or by scaling a standard broad-band spectral                  Figure F.1 depicts a situation in which a site is to be shape to envelope the average of the ground motion lev        used for a certified design with an established SSE (for els for 5 and 10 Hz (Sa,5-10), and 1 and 2.5 Hz (Sa,1-2.5)    instance, an Advanced light Water Reactor with 0.3g as determined in Step C.2 of Appendix C to this guide.        PGA SSE). In this example, the certified design SSE
It is anticipated that a regulatory guide will be de veloped that provides guidance on assessing site specific effects and determining smooth design re sponse spectra, taking into account recent develop ments in ground motion modeling and site amplifica tion studies (e.g., Ref. F.1). 
    It is anticipated that a regulatory guide will be de      spectrum compares favorably with the site-specific re veloped that provides guidance on assessing site              sponse spectra determined in Step 2 or 3 of Regulatory specific effects and determining smooth design re              Position 4.
F.2 DISCUSSION
For engineering purposes, it is essential that the de sign ground motion response spectrum be a broad-band smooth response spectrum with adequate energy in the frequencies of interest. In the past, it was general prac tice to select a standard broad-band spectrum, such as the spectrum in Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. F.2), and scale it by a peak ground motion parameter (usually peak ground acceleration (PGA)), which is derived based on the size of the controlling earthquake. During the licensing review this spectrum was checked against site-specific spectral estimates derived using Standard Review Plan Section 2.5.2 procedures to be sure that the SSE design spectrum adequately enveloped the site-specific spectrum. These past practices to define the SSE are still valid and, based on this consideration, the following three possible situations are depicted in Figures F.1 to F.3.


sponse spectra, taking into account recent develop Figure F.2 depicts a situation in which a standard ments in ground motion modeling and site amplifica broad-band shape is selected and its amplitude is scaled tion studies (e.g., Ref. F.1).                                 so that the design SSE envelopes the site-specific spec F.2   DISCUSSION                                              tra.
Figure F. 1 depicts a situation in which a site is to be used for a certified design with an established SSE (for instance, an Advanced light Water Reactor with 0.3g PGA SSE). In this example, the certified design SSE  
spectrum compares favorably with the site-specific re sponse spectra determined in Step 2 or 3 of Regulatory Position 4.


For engineering purposes, it is essential that the de          Figure F.3 depicts a situation in which a specific sign ground motion response spectrum be a broad-band          smooth shape for the design SSE spectrum is developed smooth response spectrum with adequate energy in the          to envelope the site-specific spectra. In this case, it is frequencies of interest. In the past, it was general prac      particularly important to be sure that the SSE contains tice to select a standard broad-band spectrum, such as        adequate energy in the frequency range of engineering the spectrum in Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. F.2), and          interest and is sufficiently broad-band.
Figure F.2 depicts a situation in which a standard broad-band shape is selected and its amplitude is scaled so that the design SSE envelopes the site-specific spec tra.
 
Figure F.3 depicts a situation in which a specific smooth shape for the design SSE spectrum is developed to envelope the site-specific spectra. In this case, it is particularly important to be sure that the SSE contains adequate energy in the frequency range of engineering interest and is sufficiently broad-band.


1.165=42
1.165=42


r
r
              0
0  
                    S8.1.
LU
S8.1.


LU
1.75
                                1.75           7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.1 Use of SSE Spectrum of a Certified Design
7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.1 Use of SSE Spectrum of a Certified Design  
              0       SIP-10
0  
                      0   .. ...                     "         Modified or
SIP-10  
                              0   5,                           Unmodified
0 ..  
                          "'8*-                 S         \, Standard SIhape CO
...  
                                1.75           7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.2 Use of a Standard Shape for SSE
"  
              0
Modified or  
                                                              Smooth Broad-Band Spectrum CO
0  
                                1.75         7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.3 Development of a Site-Specific SSE Spectrum (Note: the above figures illustrate situations for a rock site. For other site conditions, the SSE spectra are compared at free-field after performing site amplification studies as discussed in Step 4 of Regulatory Position 4.)
5, Unmodified  
                                            1.165-43 I I       i ti
" '8*-  
S  
\\, Standard SI
CO
hape
1.75  
7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.2 Use of a Standard Shape for SSE
Smooth Broad-Band Spectrum
1.75  
7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.3 Development of a Site-Specific SSE Spectrum (Note: the above figures illustrate situations for a rock site. For other site conditions, the SSE spectra are compared at free-field after performing site amplification studies as discussed in Step 4 of Regulatory Position 4.)  
1.165-43
0
CO
I I  
i ti


REFERENCES
REFERENCES
F.1     Electric Power Research Institute, "Guidelines                   F.2      USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic for Determining Design Basis Ground Motions,"                             Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory EPRI Report TR-102293, Volumes 1-4, May                                   Guide 1.60.21
F.1 Electric Power Research Institute, "Guidelines for Determining Design Basis Ground Motions,"  
        1993.1
EPRI Report TR-102293, Volumes 1-4, May  
                                                                            2 Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555; or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying t                                                                            for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,
1993.1 tCopies may beobtained from the EPRI Distribution Center, 207 Coggins Drive, Pleasant Hill, CA 94523; phone (510)934-4212.
  Copies may beobtained from the EPRI Distribution Center, 207 Coggins      Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash Drive, Pleasant Hill, CA 94523; phone (510)934-4212.                      ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.
 
F.2 USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.60.21
2Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555; or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,  
Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.


1.165-44
1.165-44


REGULATORY ANALYSIS
REGULATORY ANALYSIS
    A separate regulatory analysis was not prepared for   benefits of the rule as implemented by the guide. A
A separate regulatory analysis was not prepared for this regulatory guide. The regulatory analysis, "Revi sion of 10 CFR Part 100 and 10 CFR Part 50," was pre pared for the amendments, and it provides the regulato ry basis for this guide and examines the costs and benefits of the rule as implemented by the guide. A
this regulatory guide. The regulatory analysis, "Revi       copy of the regulatory analysis is available for inspec sion of 10 CFR Part 100 and 10 CFR Part 50," was pre       tion and copying for a fee at the NRC Public Document pared for the amendments, and it provides the regulato      Room, 2120 L Street NW. (Lower Level), Washington, ry basis for this guide and examines the costs and          DC, as Attachment 7 to SECY-96-118.
copy of the regulatory analysis is available for inspec tion and copying for a fee at the NRC Public Document Room, 2120 L Street NW. (Lower Level), Washington, DC, as Attachment 7 to SECY-96-118.


1.165-45 II I       i I
1.165-45 I I I
i I


I  .
on mr R
        onR mr cyclPraed Federai Recycling ProgramK
cyclPraed Federai Recycling ProgramK
I
.


UNITED STATES               FIRST CUSS MAIL
UNITED STATES  
NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION     POSTAGE AND FEES PAID
NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION  
  WASHINGTON, DC 20555-0001               USNRC
WASHINGTON, DC 20555-0001 OFICIAL BUSINESS  
                                      PERMWf NO. G-67 OFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300
    PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300}}
FIRST CUSS MAIL
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID
USNRC
PERMWf NO. G-67}}


{{RG-Nav}}
{{RG-Nav}}

Latest revision as of 02:07, 17 January 2025

(Draft Was DG-1032) Identification and Characterization of Seismic Sources and Determination of Safe-Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion
ML003740084
Person / Time
Issue date: 03/31/1997
From:
Office of Nuclear Regulatory Research
To:
References
-nr, DG-1032 RG-1.165
Download: ML003740084 (47)


U.S. NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION

Ma REGULATORY GUll OFFICE OF NUCLEAR REGULATORY RESEARCH

REGULATORY GUIDE 1.165 S(Draft was DG-1 032)

IDENTIFICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF SEISMIC SOURCES AND

DETERMINATION OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION

rch 1997

E

A. INTRODUCTION

In 10 CFR Part 100, "Reactor Site Criteria," Sec tion 100.23, "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors,"

paragraph (c), "Geological, Seismological, and Engi neering Characteristics," requires that the geological, seismological, and engineering characteristics of a site and its environs be investigated in sufficient scope and detail to permit an adequate evaluation of the proposed site, to provide sufficient information to support evalu ations performed to arrive at estimates of the Safe Shut down Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), and to permit adequate engineering solutions to actual or potential geologic and seismic effects at the proposed site. Data on the vibratory ground motion, tectonic surface de formation, nontectonic deformation, earthquake recur rence rates, fault geometry and slip rates, site founda tion material, and seismically induced floods, water waves, and other siting factors will be obtained by re viewing pertinent literature and carrying out field investigations.

. In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (d), "Geologic and Seismic Siting Factors," requires that the geologic and seismic siting factors considered for design include a determination of the SSE for the site, the potential for surface tectonic and nontectonic deformations, the de- USNRC REGULATORY GUIDES

Regulatory Guides wre Issued to describe and make available to the public such informa lion as methods acceptable to the NRC staff for Implementing specific parts of the Com missions reguldion, techniques used by the staff In aluaftng specific problems orpoe Uated accidents, and data needed by he NRC staff In Its review of applicatiors for per mits aid licenses. Regulatory guides we not substitutes for regulations, and compliance with themn Is not required. Methods and aloutions different from those set out In the Ogides will be acceptable I #W provide a basis for the f*wngs requisfte to the issuance or con.

tiriance of a permit or icense by fth Commission.

This guide was issued after consideration of comments received trom the public. Com ments and suggestlons for rmprovements In these guides reancouraged at anlnts, and guides will be revlseds appropriate, to scomrnodste comments and to ref:ect now in formation or aperlence.

Written commerts may be submrted to fte Rules Review and Directives Branch. CFIPS,

ADM, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Washington. DC 20555-0001.

sign bases for seismically induced floods and water waves, and other design conditions.

In 10 CFR 100.23, paragraph (dX1), "Determina tion of the Safe -Shutdown Earthquake Ground Mo tion," requires that uncertainty inherent in estimates of the SSE be addressed through an appropriate analysis, such as a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis or suit able sensitivity analyses.

This guide has been developed to provide general guidance on procedures acceptable to the NRC staff for

(1) conducting geological, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical investigations, (2) identifying and characterizing seismic sources, (3) conducting proba bilistic seismic hazard analyses, and (4) determining the SSE for satisfying the requirements of 10 CFR

100.23.

This guide contains several appendices that ad dress the objectives stated above. Appendix A con tains a list of definitions of pertinent terms. Appendix B describes the procedure used to determine the refer ence probability for the SSE exceedance level that is acceptable to the staff. Appendix C discusses the de velopment of a seismic hazard information base and the determination of the probabilistic ground motion level and controlling earthquakes. Appendix D dis cusses site-specific geological, seismological, and

"The guides we issued In the following ten broad divisions:

1. Power Reactors

2. .Research and Test Reactors

& Fuels and Materials Facilities

4. Environmental and Siting

& Materials and Plant Protection

6. Products

7. Transportation

8. Occupational Health

9. Antilrust and Financial Review

10. General Sinogle copies of regulatory guides may be obtained hre of charge by writng the Office of Administration. Attention: Distribution end Moi Services Section, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Cornmission Washinglon. DC 20555-0001; or by fla at (301)4162260.

issued guides may also be purchased from the National Technical Information Service on a standing order basis. Dleails on this service may be obtained by writing NTIS, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springf*eld, VA 22161.

geophysical investigations. Appendix E describes a method to confirm the adequacy of existing seismic sources and source parameters as the basis for deter mining the SSE for a site. Appendix F describes pro cedures to determine the SSE.

The information collections contained in this regu latory guide are covered by the requirements of 10 CFR

Part 50, which were approved by the Office of Manage ment and Budget, approval number 3150-0011. The NRC may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information un less it displays a currently valid OMB control number.

B. DISCUSSION

BACKGROUND

A probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA)

has been identified in 10 CFR 100.23 as a means to de termine the SSE and account for uncertainties in the seismological and geological evaluations. The rule fur ther recognizes that the nature of uncertainty and the ap propriate approach to account for it depend on the tec tonic regime and parameters such as the knowledge of seismic sources, the existence of historical and re corded data, and the level of understanding of the tec tonics. Therefore, methods other than probabilistic methods such as sensitivity analyses may be adequate for some sites to account for uncertainties.

-Appendix A, "Seismic and Geologic Siting Crite ria for Nuclear Power Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100 is primarily based on a deterministic methodology. Past licensing experience in applying Appendix A has dem onstrated the need to formulate procedures that quanti tatively incorporate uncertainty (including alternative scientific interpretations) in the evaluation of seismic hazards. A single deterministic representation of seis mic sources and ground motions at a site may not explicitly provide a quantitative representation of the uncertainties in geological, seismological, and geo physical data and alternative scientific interpretations.

Probabilistic procedures were developed during the past 10 to 15 years specifically for nuclear power plant seismic hazard assessments in the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) (the area east of the Rocky Mountains), also referred to as the Stable Con tinent Region (SCR). These procedures provide a structured approach for decisionmaking with respect to the SSE when performed together with site-specif ic investigations. A PSHA provides a framework to address the uncertainties associated with the identifi cation and characterization of seismic sources by in corporating multiple interpretations of seismologi- cal parameters. A PSHA also provides an evaluation of the likelihood of SSE recurrence during the design lifetime of a given facility, given the recurrence inter val and recurrence pattern of earthquakes in pertinent seismic sources. Within the framework of a probabil istic analysis, uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources and ground motions are identified and incorporated in the procedure at each step of the process for estimating the SSE. The role of geologi cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations is to develop geosciences information about the site for use in the detailed design analysis of the facility, as well as to ensure that the seismic hazard analysis is based on up-to-date information.

Experience in performing seismic hazard evalua tions in active plate-margin regions in the Western United States (for example, the San Gregorio-Hosgri fault zone and the Cascadia Subduction Zone) has also identified uncertainties associatedwith the char acterization of seismic sources (Refs. 1-3). Sources of uncertainty include fault geometry, rupture seg mentation, rupture extent, seismic-activity rate, ground motion, and earthquake occurrence model ing. As is the case for sites in the CEUS, alternative hypotheses and parameters must be considered to ac count for these uncertainties.

Uncertainties associated with the identification and characterization of seismic sources in tectonic en vironments in both the CEUS and the Western United States should be evaluated. Therefore, the same basic approach can be applied to determine the SSE.

APPROACH

The general process to determine the SSE at a site includes:

1. Site- and region-specific geological, seismo logical, geophysical, and geotechnical inves tigations and

2. A probabilistic seismic hazard assessment.

CENTRAL AND EASTERN UNITED STATES

The CEUS is considered to be that part of the United States east of the Rocky Mountain front, or east of Longitude 1050 West (Refs. 4, 5). To deter mine the SSE in the CEUS, an accepted PSHAmeth odology with a range of credible alternative input in terpretations should be used. For sites in the CEUS,

the seismic hazard methods, the data developed, and seismic sources identified by Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) (Refs. 4-6) and the

1.165'-2 K

Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (Ref. 7)

have been reviewed and accepted by the staff. The LLNL and EPRI studies developed data bases and scientific interpretations of available information K1 and determined seismic sources and source charac terizations for the CEUS (e.g., earthquake occur rence rates, estimates of maximum magnitude).

In the CEUS, characterization of seismic sources is more problematic than in the active plate-margin region because there is generally no clear association between seismicity and known tectonic structures or near-surface geology. In general, the observed geo logic structures were generated in response to tecton ic forces that no longer exist and have little or no cor relation with current tectonic forces. Therefore, it is important to account for this uncertainty by the use of multiple alternative models.

The identification of seismic sources and reason able alternatives in the CEUS considers hypotheses presently advocated for the occurrence of earth quakes in the CEUS (for example, the reactivation of favorably oriented zones of weakness or the local am plification and release of stresses concentrated around a geologic structure). In tectonically active areas of the CEUS, such as the New Madrid Seismic Zone, where geological, seismological, and geo

.

physical evidence suggest the nature of the sources that generate the earthquakes, it may be more ap propriate to evaluate those seismic sources by using procedures similar to those normally applied in the Western United States.

WESTERN UNITED STATES

The Western United States is considered to be that part of the United States that lies west of the Rocky Mountain front, or west of approximately 1050 West Longitude. For the Western United States, an informa tion base of earth science data and scientific interpreta tions of seismic sources and source characterizations (e.g., geometry, seismicity parameters) comparable to the CEUS as documented in the LLNL and EPRI stud ies (Refs. 4-7) does not exist. For this region, specific interpretations on a site-by-site basis should be applied (Ref. 1).

The active plate-margin region includes, for exam ple, coastal California, Oregon, Washington, and Alas ka. For the active plate-margin region, where earth quakes can often be correlated with known tectonic structures, those structures should be assessed for their earthquake and surface deformation potential. In this region, at least three types of sources exist: (1) faults that are known to be at or near the surface, (2) buried (blind) sources that may often be manifested as folds at the earth's surface, and (3) subduction zone sources, such as those in the Pacific Northwest. The nature of surface faults can be evaluated by conventional surface and near-surface investigation techniques to assess ori entation, geometry, sense of displacements, length of rupture, Quaternary history, etc.

Buried (blind) faults are often associated with surficial deformation such as folding, uplift, or subsi dence. The surface expression of blind faulting can be detected by mapping the uplifted or down-dropped geomorphological features or stratigraphy, survey leveling, and geodetic methods. The nature of the structure at depth can often be evaluated by core bor ings and geophysical techniques.

Continental United States subduction zones are lo cated in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska. Seismic sources associated with subduction zones are sources within the overriding plate, on the interface between the subducting and overriding lithospheric plates, and in the interior of the downgoing oceanic slab. The charac terization of subduction zone seismic sources includes consideration of the three-dimensional geometry of the subducting plate, rupture segmentation of subduction zones, geometry of historical ruptures, constraints on the up-dip and down-dip extent of rupture, and compar isons with other subduction zones worldwide.

The Basin and Range region of the Western United States, and to a lesser extent the Pacific North west and the Central United States, exhibit temporal clustering of earthquakes. Temporal clustering is best exemplified by the rupture histories within the Wasatch fault zone in Utah and the Meers fault in cen tral Oklahoma, where several large late Holocene co seismic faulting events occurred at relatively close intervals (hundreds to thousands of years) that were preceded by long periods of quiescence that lasted thousands to tens of thousand years. Temporal clus tering should be considered in these regions or wher ever paleoseismic evidence indicates that it has oc curred.

C. REGULATORY POSITION

1. GEOLOGICAL, GEOPHYSICAL,

SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOTECHNICAL

INVESTIGATIONS

1.1 Comprehensive geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations of the site and regions around the site should be performed.

1.165-3

For existing nuclear power plant sites where addi tional units are planned, the geosciences technical in formation originally used to validate those sites may, be inadequate, depending on how much new or addi tional information has become available since the ini tial investigations and analyses were performed, the quality of the investigations performed at the time, and the complexity of the site and regional geology and seismology. This technical information should be utilized along with all other available information to plan and determine the scope of additional inves tigations. The investigations described in this regula tory guide are performed primarily to gather informa tion needed to confirm the suitability of the site and to gather data pertinent to the safe design and construc tion of the nuclear power plant. Appropriate geologi cal, seismological, and geophysical investigations are described in Appendix D to this guide. Geotech nical investigations are described in Regulatory Guide 1.132, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants" (Ref. 8). Another important purpose for the site-specific investigations is to de termine whether there are new data or interpretations that are not adequately incorporated in the existing PSHA data bases. Appendix E describes a method for evaluating new information derived from the site specific investigations in the context of the PSHA.

These investigations should be performed at four levels, with the degree of their detail based on distance from the site, the nature of the Quaternary tectonic regime, the geological complexity of the site and re gion, the existence of potential seismic sources, the po tential for surface deformations, etc. A more detailed discussion of the areas and levels of investigations and the bases for them is presented in Appendix D to this regulatory guide. The levels of investigation are char acterized as follows.

1.

Regional geological and seismological inves tigations are not expected to be extensive nor in great detail, but should include literature re views, the study of maps and remote sensing data, and, if necessary, ground truth reconnais sances conducted within a radius of 320 km

(200 miles) of the site to identify seismic.

sources (seismogenic and capable tectonic sources).

2.

Geological, seismological, and geophysical in vestigations should be carried out within a ra dius of 40 km (25 miles) in greater detail than the regional investigations to identify and char- acterize the seismic and surface deformation potential of any capable tectonic sources and the seismic potential of seismogenic sources, or to demonstrate that such structures are not pres ent. Sites with capable tectonic or seismogenic sources within a radius of 40 km (25 miles) may require more extensive geological and seismo logical investigations and analyses (similar in detail to investigations and analysis usually preferred within an 8-km (5-mile) radius).

3.

Detailed geological, seismological, geophysical, and geotechnical investigations should be con ducted within a radius of 8 km (5 miles) of the site, as appropriate, to evaluate the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface and to assess the ground motion transmission characteristics of soils and rocks in the site vicin ity. Investigations should include monitoring by a network of seismic stations.

4.

Very detailed geological, geophysical, and geo technical engineering investigations should be conducted within the site [radius of approximate ly 1 km (0.5 miles)] to assess specific soil and rock characteristics as described in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. 8).

1.2 The areas of investigations may be expanded beyond those specified above in regions that include ca pable tectonic sources, relatively high seismicity, or complex geology, or in regions that have experienced a large, geologically recent earthquake.

1.3 It should be demonstrated that deformation features discovered during construction, particularly faults, do not have the potential to compromise the safety of the plant. The two-step licensing practice, which required applicants to acquire a Construction Permit (CP), and then during construction apply for an Operating License (OL), has been modified to al low for an alternative procedure. The requirements and procedures applicable to NRC's issuance of com bined licenses for nuclear power facilities are in Sub part C of 10 CFR Part 52. Applying the combined li censing procedure to a site could result in the award of a license prior to the start of construction. During the construction of nuclear power plants licensed in the past two decades, previously unknown faults were often discovered in site excavations. Before issuance of the OL, it was necessary to demonstrate that the;

faults in the excavation posed no hazard to the facili ty. Under the combined license procedure, these kinds of features should be mapped and assessed as to

1.165-4

their rupture and ground motion generating potential while the excavations' walls and bases are exposed.

Therefore, a commitment should be made, in docu ments (Safety Analysis Reports) supporting the li cense application, to geologically map all excava tions and to notify the NRC staff when excavations are open for inspection.

1.4 Data sufficient to clearly justify all conclu sions should be presented. Because engineering solu tions cannot always be satisfactorily demonstrated for the effects of permanent ground displacement, it is pru dent to avoid a site that has a potential for surface or near-surface deformation. Such sites normally will re quire extensive additional investigations.

1.5 For the site and for the area surrounding the site, the lithologic, stratigraphic, hydrologic, and structural geologic conditions should be character ized. The investigations should include the measure ment of the static and dynamic engineering proper ties of the materials underlying the site and an evaluation of physical evidence concerning the be havior during prior earthquakes of the surficial mate rials and the substrata underlying the site. The prop erties needed to assess the behavior of the underlying material during earthquakes, including the potential for liquefaction, and the characteristics of the under lying material in transmitting earthquake ground mo tions to the foundations of the plant (such as seismic wave velocities, density, water content, porosity, elastic moduli, and strength) should be measured.

2. SEISMIC SOURCES SIGNIFICANT TO

THE SITE SEISMIC HAZARD

2.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the EPRI or LLNL PSHA methodologies and data bases are used to determine the SSE, it still may be necessary to investi gate and characterize potential seismic sources that were previously unknown or uncharacterized and to perform sensitivity analyses to assess their significance to the seismic hazard estimate. The results of investiga tions discussed in Regulatory Position 1 should be used, in accordance with Appendix E, to determine whether the LLNL or EPRI seismic sources and their characterization should be updated. The guidance in Regulatory Positions 2.2 and 2.3 below and in Appen dix D of this guide may be used if additional seismic sources are to be developed as a result of investigations.

2.2 When the LLNL and EPRI methods are not used or are not applicable, the guidance in Regulatory Position 2.3 should be used for identification and char acterization of seismic sources. The uncertainties in the characterization of seismic sources should be ad dressed as appropriate. Seismic source is a general term referring to both seismogenic sources and capable tec tonic sources. The main distinction between these two types of seismic sources is that a seismogenic source would not cause surface displacement, but a capable tectonic source causes surface or near-surface displace ment.

Identification and characterization of seismic sources should be based on regional and site geological and geophysical data, historical and instrumental seis micity data, the regional stress field, and geological ev idence of prehistoric earthquakes. Investigations to identify seismic sources are described in Appendix D.

The bases for the identification of seismic sources should be documented. A general list of characteristics to be evaluated for a seismic source is presented in Ap pendix D.

S2.3 -As part of the seismic source pharacteriza tion, the seismic potential for each source should be evaluated. Typically, characterization of the seismic potential consists of four equally important elements:

1.

Selection of a model for the spatial distribution of earthquakes in a source.

2.

Selection of a model for the temporal distribution of earthquakes in a source.

3.

Selection of a model for the relative frequency of earthquakes of various magnitudes, including an estimate for the largest earthquake that could oc cur in the source under the current tectonic regime.

4.

A complete description of the uncertainty.

For example, in the LLNL study a truncated expo nential model was used for the distribution of magni tudes given that an earthquake has occurred in a source.

A stationary Poisson process is used to model the spa tial and temporal occurrences of earthquakes in a source.

For a general discussion of evaluating the earth quake potential and characterizing the uncertainty, re fer to the Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee Report (Ref. 9).

2.3.1 For sites in the CEUS, when the LLNL or EPRI method is not used or not applicable (such as in the New Madrid Seismic Zone), it is necessary to evalu ate the seismic potential for each source. The seismic sources and data that have been accepted by the NRC in past licensing decisions may be used, along with the

1.165-5

data gathered from the investigations carried out as de scribed in Regulatory Position 1.

Generally, the seismic sources for the CEUS are area sources because there is uncertainty about the underlying causes of earthquakes. This uncertainty is due to a lack of active surface faulting, a low rate of seismic activity, and a short historical record. The as sessment of earthquake recurrence for CEUS area sources commonly relies heavily on catalogs of ob served seismicity. Because these catalogs are incom plete and cover a relatively short period of time, it is difficult to obtain reliable estimates of the rate of ac tivity. Considerable care must be taken to correct for incompleteness and to model the uncertainty in the rate of earthquake recurrence. To completely charac terize the seismic potential for a source it is also nec essary to estimate the largest earthquake magnitude that a seismic source is capable of generating under the current tectonic regime. This estimated magni tude defines the upper bound of the earthquake recur rence relationship.

The assessment of earthquake potential for area sources is particularly difficult because the physical constraint most important to the assessment, the di mensions of the fault rupture, is not known, As a re sult, the primary methods for assessing maximum earthquakes for area sources usually include a con sideration of the historical seismicity record, the pat tern and rate of seismic activity, the Quaternary (2 million years and younger), characteristics of the source, the current stress regime (and how it aligns with known tectonic structures), paleoseismic data, and analogues to sources in other regions considered tectonically similar to the CEUS. Because of the shortness of the historical catalog and low rate of seismic activity, considerable judgment is needed. It is important to characterize the large uncertainties in the assessment of the earthquake potential.

2.3.2 For sites located within the Western United States, earthquakes can often be associated with known tectonic structures. For faults, the earthquake potential is related to the characteristics of the estimated future rupture, such as the total rupture area, the length, or the amount of fault displacement. The following empirical relations can be used to estimate the earthquake poten tial from fault behavior data and also to estimate the amount of displacement that might be expected for a given magnitude. It is prudent to use several of these different relations to obtain an estimate of the earth quake magnitude.

"*

Surface rupture length versus magnitude (Refs.

10-13),

"*

Subsurface rupture length versus magnitude (Ref. 14),

"*

Rupture area versus magnitude (Ref. 15),

"*

Maximum and average displacement versus magnitude (Ref. 14),

"*

Slip rate versus magnitude (Ref. 16).

When such correlations as References 10-16 are used, the earthquake potential is often evaluated as the mean of the distribution. The difficult issue is the evalu ation of the appropriate rupture dimension to be used.

This is a judgmental process based on geological data for the fault in question and the behavior of other re gional fault systems of the same type.

The other elements of the. recurrence model are generally obtained using catalogs of seismicity, fault slip rate, and other data. In some cases, it may be ap propriate to use recurrence models with memory. All the sources of uncertainty must be appropriately mod eled. Additionally, the phenomenon of temporal clus tering should be considered when there is geological evidence of its past occurrence.

2.3.3 For sites near subduction zones, such as in the Pacific Northwest and Alaska, the maximum mag nitude must be assessed for subduction zone seismic sources. Worldwide observations indicate that the larg est known earthquakes are associated with the plate in terface, although intraslab earthquakes may also have large magnitudes. The assessment of plate interface earthquakes can be based on estimates of the expected dimensions of rupture or analogies to other subduction zones worldwide.

3. PROBABILISTIC SEISMIC HAZARD

ANALYSIS PROCEDURES

A PSHA should be performed for the site as it al lows the use of multiple models to estimate the likeli hood of earthquake ground motions occurring at a site, and a PSHA systematically takes into account uncer tainties that exist in various parameters (such as seismic sources, maximum 'earthquakes,.

and ground motion attenuation). Alternative hypotheses areý con sidered in a quantitative fashion in a PSHA. Alterna tive hypotheses can also be used to evaluate the sensi tivity of the hazard to the uncertainties in the significant parameters and to identify the relative contribution of each seismic source to the hazard. Reference 9 provides guidance for conducting a PSHA.

The following steps describe a procedure that is ac ceptable to the NRC staff for performing a PSHA. The

1.165-6

.-

details of the calculational aspects of deriving control ling earthquakes from the PSHA are included in Ap pendix C.

/

1.

Perform regional and site geological, seismologi cal, and geophysical investigations in accordance with Regulatory Position I and Appendix D.

2.

For CEUS sites, perform an evaluation of LLNL or EPRI seismic sources in accordance with Appendix E to determine whether they are consistent with the site-specific data gathered in Step 1 or require updating. The PSHAshould only be updated if the new information indi cates that the current version significantly un derestimates the hazard and there is a strong technical basis that supports such a revision. It may be possible to justify a lower hazard esti mate with an exceptionally strong technical ba sis. However, it is expected that large uncertain ties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS

will continue to exist in the future, and substan tial delays in the licensing process will result in trying to justify a lower value with respect to a specific site. For these reasons the NRC staff discourages efforts to justify a lower hazard es timate. In most cases, limited-scope sensitivity studies should be sufficient to demonstrate that the existing data base in the PSHA envelops the findings from site-specific investigations. In general, significant revisions to the LLNL and EPRI data base are to be undertaken only peri odically (every 10 years), or when there is an important new finding or occurrence. An over all revision of the data base would also require a reexamination of the acceptability of the refer ence probability discussed in Appendix B and used in Step 4 below. Any significant update should follow the guidance of Reference 9.

3.

For CEUS sites only, perform the LLNL or EPRI probabilistic seismic hazard analysis us ing original or updated sources as determined in Step 2. For sites in other parts of the country, perform a site-specific PSHA (Reference 9).

The ground motion estimates should be made for rock conditions in the free-field or by as suming hypothetical rock conditions for a non rock site to develop the seismic hazard informa tion base discussed in Appendix C.

4.

Using the reference probability (1E-5 per year)

described in Appendix B, determine the 5% of critically damped median spectral ground mo tion levels for the average of 5 and 10 Hz, Sa-,510, and for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, Sa,1.2.5. Appendix B discusses situations in which an alternative reference probability may be more appropriate. The alternative reference probability is reviewed and accepted on a case by-case basis. Appendix B also describes a pro cedure that should be used when a general revi sion to the reference probability is needed.

5.

Deaggregate the median probabilistic hazard characterization in accordance with Appendix C

to determine the controlling earthquakes (i.e.,

magnitudes and distances). Document the hazard information base as discussed in Appendix C.

4. PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING THE

SSE

After completing the PSHA (See Regulatory Posi tion 3) and determining the controlling earthquakes, the following procedure should be used to determine the SSE. Appendix F contains an additional discussion of some of the characteristics of the SSE.

1.

With the controlling earthquakes determined as described in Regulatory Position 3 and by using the procedures in Revision 3 of Standard Re view Plan (SRP) Section 2.5.2 (which may in clude the use of ground motion models not in cluded in the PSHA but that are more appropriate for the source, region, and site un der consideration or that represent the latest scientific development), develop 5% of critical damping response spectral shapes for the actual or assumed rock conditions. The same control ling earthquakes are also used to derive vertical response spectral shapes.

2.

Use Sa,5-10 to scale the response spectrum shape corresponding to the controlling earthquake. If, as described in Appendix C, there is a control ling earthquake for Sa,1-2.5, determine that the Sa,5-10 scaled response spectrum also envelopes the ground motion spectrum for the controlling earthquake for Sa,1-2.5. Otherwise, modify the shape to envelope the low-frequency spectrum or use two spectra in the following steps. See additional discussion in Appendix F. For a rock site go to Step 4.

3.

For nonrock sites, perform a site-specific soil am plification analysis considering uncertainties in site-specific geotechnical properties and parame

65-7

ters to determine response spectra at the free ground surface in the freefield for the actual site conditions.

4.

Compare the smooth SSE spectrum or spectra used in design (e.g., 0.3g, broad-band spectra used in advanced light-water reactor designs)

with the spectrum or spectra determined in Step 2 for rock sites or determined in Step 3 for the non rock sites to assess the adequacy of the SSE spec trum or spectra.

To obtain an adequate design SSE based on the site-specific response spectrum or spectra, develop a smooth spectrum or spectra or use a standard broad band shape that envelopes the spectra of Step 2 or Step 3.

Additional discussion of this step is provided in Appendix F.

D. IMPLEMENTATION

The purpose of this section is to provide guidance to applicants and licensees regarding the NRC staff's plans for using this regulatory guide.

Except in those cases in which the applicant pro poses an acceptable alternative method for comply ing with the specified portions of the Commission's regulations, this guide will be used in the evaluation of applications for construction permits, operating li censes, early site permits, or combined licenses sub mitted after January 10, 1997. This guide will not be used in the evaluation of an application for an operat ing license submitted after January 10, 1997, if the construction permit was issued prior to that date.

1.165-8

REFERENCES

S1. Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Program;

Diablo Canyon Power Plant18 Doc8.t Nos. 50-275 and 50-323, 198PD1

2.

R- Rood et aL, "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Power Plant, Units 1 and V" NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, USNRC, June 1991.2

3.

Letter from G. Sorensen, Washington Public Power Supply System, to Document Control Branch, USNRC. Subject: Nuclear Project No. 3, Resolution of Key Licensing Issues, Response;

February 29, 1988.1

4.

D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, Vol umes 1-8, January 1989.2

5.

P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"

NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.2

2

6.

J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Character ization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Lawrence Liv ermore National Laboratory, June 1993.1 (Accession number 9310190318 in NRC's Public Document Room)

7.

Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United States," NP-4726, All Volumes, 1989-1991.

lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail ing address is Mail Stop LEA Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mail ing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, PRO Box 37082, Washington, DC

20402-9328(telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical In formation Service by writing NMIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA

22161.

8.

USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.132.3

9.

Senior Seismic Hazard Analysis Committee (SSHAC), "Recommendations for Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis: Guidance on Uncer tainty and Use of Experts," Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory, UCRL-ID-122160, Au gust 1995 (to be published as NUREG/CR 6372).

10.

D.B. Slemmons, "Faults and Earthquake Magni tude," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Water ways Experiment Station, Misc. Papers S-73-1, Report 6, 1977.

11.

D.B. Slemmons, "Determination of Design Earthquake Magnitudes for Microzonation,"

Proceedings of the Third International Micro zonation Conference, University of Washington, Seattle, Volume 1, pp. 119-130, 1982.

12.

M.G. Bonilla, H.A. Villalobos, and R.E. Wallace,

"Exploratory Trench Across the Pleasant Valley Fault, Nevada," Professional Paper 1274-B, U.S.

Geological Survey, pp. B1-B14, 1984.1

13.

S.G. Wesnousky, "Relationship Between Total Affect, Degree of Fault Trace Complexity, and Earthquake Size on Major Strike-Slip Faults in California" (Abs), Seismological Research Let-,

ters, Volume 59, No. 1, p. 3, 1988.

14.

D.L Wells and K.J. Coppersmith, 'New Empirical Relationships Among Magnitude, Rupture Length, Rupture Width, Rupture Area, and Surface Displace men," Bulletn of the Seismological Sociy of America, Volume 84, August 1994.

15.

M. Wyss, "Estimating Maximum Expectable Mag nitude of Earthquakes from Fault Dimensions,"

Geology, Volume 7 (7), pp. 336-340, 1979.

16.

D.P. Schwartz and KJ. Coppersmith, "Seismic Hazards: New Trends in Analysis Using Geolog ic Data," Active Tectonics, National Academy Press, Washington, DC, pp. 215-230, 1986.

3Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be obtained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Altn: Distribution and Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at

(301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-., Washington, DC 20555;

telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

1.165-9

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS

Controlling Earthquakes -

Controlling earthquakes are the earthquakes used to determine spectral shapes or to estimate ground motions at the site. There may be several controlling earthquakes for a site. As a result of the probabalistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), con trolling earthquakes are characterized as mean magni tudes and distances derived from a deaggregation anal ysis of the median estimate of the PSHA.

Earthquake Recurrence -

Earthquake recurrence is the frequency of occurrence of earthquakes having vari ous magnitudes. Recurrence relationships or curves are developed for each seismic source, and they reflect the frequency of occurrence (usually expressed on an annual basis) of magnitudes up to the maximum, in cluding measures of uncertainty.

Intensity -

The intensity of an earthquake is a meas ure of vibratory ground motion effects on humans, on human-built structures, and on the earth's surface at a particular location. Intensity is described by a numeri cal value on the Modified Mercalli scale.

Magnitude -

An earthquake's magnitude is a meas ure of the strength of the earthquake as determined from seismographic observations.

Maximum Magnitude -The maximum magnitude is the upper bound to recurrence curves.

Nontectonic Deformation -

Nontectonic deforma tion is distortion of surface or near-surface soils or rocks that is not directly attributable to tectonic activity.

Such deformation includes features associated with subsidence, karst terrane, glaciation or deglaciation, and growth faulting.

Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE)

-Th/o/SSE

is the vibratory ground motion for which certain structures, systems, and components are de signed, pursuant to Appendix S to 10 CFR Part 50, to remain functional.

The SSE for the site is characterized by both horizon tal and vertical free-field ground motion response spec tra at the free ground surface.

Seismic Potential -

A model giving a complete de scription of the future earthquake activity in a seismic source zone. The model includes a relation giving the frequency (rate) of earthquakes of any magnitude, an estimate of the largest earthquake that could occur un der the current tectonic regime, and a complete descrip tion of the uncertainty. A typical model used for PSHA

is the use of a truncated exponential model for the mag nitude distribution and a stationary Poisson process for the temporal and spatial occurrence of earthquakes.

Seismic Source'- Seismic source is a general term re ferring to both seismogenic sources and capable tecton ic sources.

Capable Tectonic Source -

A capable tectonic source is a tectonic structure that can generate both vibratory ground motion and tectonic surface de formation such as faulting or folding at or near the earth's surface in the present seismotectonic re gime. It is described by at least one of the following characteristics:

a. Presence. of surface or near-surfice deforma tion of landforms or geologic deposits of a re curring nature within the last approximately

500,000 years or at least once in the last approximately 50,000 years.

b. A reasonable association with one or more moderate to large earthquakes or sustained earthquake activity that are usually accompa nied by significant surface deformation.

c. A structural association with a capable tectonic source having characteristics of either section a or b in this paragraph such that movement on one could be reasonably expected to be accom panied by movement on the other.

  • In some cases, the geological evidence of past activity at or near the ground surface along a poten tial capable tectonic source may be obscured at a particular site. This might occur, for example, at a site having a deep overburden. For these cases, evi dence may exist elsewhere along the structure from which an evaluation of its characteristics in the vi cinity of the site can be reasonably based. Such evi dence is to be used in determining whether the structure is a capable tectonic source within this definition.

Notwithstanding the foregoing paragraphs, the association of a structure with geological structures that are at least pre-Quaternary, such as many of those found in the Central and Eastern regions of the United States, in the absence of conflicting evi dence will demonstrate that the structure is not a ca pable tectonic source within this definition.

1.165-10

K

Seismogenic Source -

A seismogenic source is a portion of the earth that we assume has uniform earthquake potential (same expected maximum earthquake and recurrence frequency), distinct from the seismicity of the surrounding regions. A

seismogenic source will generate vibratory ground motion but is assumed not to cause surface dis placement. Seismogenic sources cover a wide range of possibilities from a well-defined tectonic structure to simply a large region of diffuse seis micity (seismotectonic province) thought to be characterized by the same earthquake recurrence model. A seismogenic source is also characterized by its involvement in the current tectonic regime (the Quaternary, or approximately the last 2 million years).

Stable Continental Region -A stable continental re gion (SCR) is composed of continental crust, including continental shelves, slopes, and attenuated continental crust, and excludes active plate boundaries and zones of currently active tectonics directly influenced by plate margin processes. It exhibits no significant deforma tion associated with the major Mesozoic-to-Cenozoic (last 240 million years) orogenic belts. It excludes ma jor zones of Neogene (last 25 million years) rifting, vol canism, or suturing.

Stationary Poisson Process -

A probabilistic model of the occurrence of an event over time (space) that is characterized by (1) the occurrence of the event in small intervals is constant over time (space), (2) the occur rence of two (or more) events in a small interval is neg ligible, and (3) the occurrence of the event in non-over lapping intervals is independent..

Tectonic Structure -

A tectonic structure is a large scale dislocation or distortion, usually within the earth's crust. Its 'extent may be on the order of tens of meters (yards) to hundreds of kilometers (miles).

1.165-11 I

I

I

1 .

APPENDIX B.

REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE EXCEEDANCE LEVEL OF THE

SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION

B.1 INTRODUCTION

This appendix describes the procedure that is ac ceptable to the NRC staff to determine the reference probability, an annual probability of exceeding the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE), at future nuclear power plant sites. The reference probability is used in Appendix C in conjunction with the probabilis tic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).

B.2 REFERENCE PROBABILITY FOR THE

SSE

The reference probability is the annual probability level such that 50% of a set of currently operating plants (selected by the NRC, see Table B.1) has an annual mp dian probability of exceeding the SSE that is below this level. The reference probability is determined for the annual probability of exceeding the average of the 5 and

10 Hz SSE response spectrum ordinates associated with 5% of critical damping.

B.3 PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE

REFERENCE PROBABILITY

The following procedure was used to determine the reference probability and should be used in the future if general revisions to PSHA methods or data bases result in significant changes in hazard predictions for the se lected plant sites in Table B.I.

The reference probability is calculated using the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL)

methodology and results (Refs. B.1 and B.2) but is also considered applicable for the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) study (Refs. B.3 and B.4). This refer ence probability is also to be used in conjunction with sites not in the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) and for sites for which LLNL and EPRI meth ods and data have not been used or are not available.

However, the final SSE at a higher reference probabili ty may be more appropriate and acceptable 1 for some sites considering the slope characteristics of the site hazard curves, the overall uncertainty in calculations (i.e., differences between mean and median hazard esti mates), and the knowledge of the seismic sources that contribute to the hazard. Reference B.4 includes a pro cedure to determine an alternative reference probability lThe use of a higher reference probability will be reviewed and accepted on a caseby-case basis.

on the risk-based considerations; its application will also be reviewed on a case-by-case basis.

B.3.1 Selection of Current Plants for Reference Probability Calculations..

Table B.1 identifies plants, along with their site characteristics, used in calculating the reference proba bility. These plants represent relatively recent designs that used Regulatory Guide 1.60, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants"

(Ref. B.5), or similar spectra as their design bases. The use of these plants should ensure an adequate level of conservatism-in determining an SSE consistent with re cent licensing decisions.

B3.2 Procedure To Establish Reference Probability Step 1 Using LLNL, EPRI, or a comparable methodology that is acceptable to the NRC staff, calculate the seismic hazard results for the site for spectral responses at 5 and

10 Hz (as stated earlier, the staff used the LLNL meth odology and associated results as documented in Refs.

B.1 and B.2).

Step 2 Calculate the composite annual probability of ex ceeding the SSE for spectral responses at 5 and 10 Hz using median hazard estimates. The composite annual probability is determined as:

Composite probability = 1/2(al) + 1/2(a2)

where al and a2 represent median annual probabil ities of exceeding SSE spectral ordinates at 5 and 10

Hz, respectively. The procedure is illustrated in Figure B-1.

Step 3 Figure B-2 illustrates the distribution of median probabilities of exceeding the SSEs for the plants in Table B.1 based on the LLNL methodology (Refs. B.1 and B.2). The reference probability is simply the me dian probability of this distribution.

For the LLNL methodology, this reference proba bility is 1E-5/yr and, as stated earlier, is also to be used in conjunction with the current EPRI methodology (Ref. B.3) or for sites not in the CEUS.

1.165-12 K

Table B.A

Plants/Sites Used In Determining Reference Probability Soil Condition Soil Condition Plant/Site Name Primary/Secondary*

Plant/Site Name Primary/Secondary*

limerick Rock Byron Rock Shearon Harris Sand - S1 Clinton Till - T3 Braidwood Rock Davis Besse Rock River Bend Deep Soil LaSalle Till - T2 Wolf Creek Rock Perry Rock Watts Bar Rock Bellefonte Rock Vogtle Deep Soil Callaway Rock/Sand - S1 Seabrook Rock Comanche Peak Rock Three Mile Is.

Rock/Sand - S1 Grand Gulf Deep Soil Catawba Rock/Sand - S1 South Texas Deep Soil Hope Creek Deep Soil Waterfoid Deep Soil McGuire Rock Millstone 3 Rock North Anna Rock/Sand - S1 Nine Mile Point Rock/Sand - S1 Summer Rock/Sand - S1

-Brunswick Sand - S1 Beaver Valley Sand - Si

  • If two soil conditions are listed, the first is the primary and the second is the secondary soil condition. See Ref. B.1 for a discussion of soil conditions.

1.165-13

al

>11

4---*

"

tW

I

5 Hz Spectral Response Median Hazard Curve

10 Hz Spectral Response Median Hazard Curve Spectral Response Figure B.1 Procedure To Compute Probability of Exceeding Design Basis

1.165-14 CD

0

a.

1

1

1.0

0.9

0.8

0.7

0




---

- Q

0

0'

0'

0

o

':

0 o I

0

o

0 o

0

0

0I

I

I

I

I

SI II

10-5 w

W

cc V,

10-4

10-3 Composite Probability of Exceeding SSE

Figure B.2 Probability of Exceeding SSE

Using Median LLNL Hazard Estimates

1.165-15 I 1 ' 1' 11 C2

.0

0

0.6

0. 5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.0

1 0-7

10-6 I ~ ~~

~~~~~~~

0

lIl

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

.

l i

" '

'i g

I

i g

i i

i

  • I

0

0

0

0

0

0

.0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

,

.

. . * * ,,I

,

.

o , .,..!

I I

REFERENCES

B.1 D.L. Bernreuter et al., "Seismic Hazard Charac terization of 69 Nuclear Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains," NUREG/CR-5250, January

1989.1 B.2 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains,"

NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1 B.3 Electric Power Research Institute, "Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Evaluations at Nuclear Power Plant Sites in the Central and Eastern United lCopies are available for inspection orcopyingfora fee from the NRC Pub lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Wash ington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.

States: Resolution of the Charleston Earthquake Issue," Report NP-6395-D, April 1989.

B.4 Attachment to Letter from D. J. Modeen, Nuclear Energy Institute, to A.J. Murphy, USNRC, Sub ject: Seismic Siting Decision Process, May 25,

1994.2 B.5 USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.60.3

2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Pub lic Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

3Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Atta: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,

Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

1.165-16 K

APPENDIX C

DETERMINATION OF CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES AND DEVELOPMENT

OF SEISMIC HAZARD INFORMATION BASE

C.1 INTRODUCTION

This appendix elaborates on the steps described in Regulatory Position 3 of this rqgulatory'guide to deter mine the controlling earthquakes used to define the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE) at the site and to develop a seismic hazard information base. The information base summarizes the contribu tion of individual magnitude and distance ranges to the seismic hazard and the magnitude and distance values of the controlling earthquakes at the average of 1 and

2.5 Hz and the average of 5 and 10 Hz. They are devel oped for the ground motion level corresponding to the reference probability as defined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide.

The spectral ground motion levels, as determined from a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA),

are used to scale a response spectrum shape. A site specific response spectrum shape is determined for the controlling earthquakes and local site conditions. Reg ulatory Position 4 and Appendix F to this regulatory guide describe a procedure 'to determine the SSE using the controlling earthquakes and results from the PSHA.

C.2 PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE

CONTROLLING EARTHQUAKES

The following is an approach acceptable to the NRC staff for determining the controlling earthquakes and developing a seismic hazard information base. This procedure is based on a de-aggregation of the probabi

-listic seismic hazard in terms of earthquake magnitudes and distances. Once the 'controlling earthquakes have been obtained, the SSE response spectrum can be deter- mined according to the procedure described in Appen dix F to this regulatory guide.

Step I

Perform a site-specific PSHA using the Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory (LLNL) or.Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) methodologies for Central and Eastern United States (CEUS) sites or per form a site-specific PSHA for sites not in the CEUS or for sites for which LLNL or EPRI methods and data are not applicable, for actual or assumed rock conditions.

The hazard assessment (mean, median, 85th percentile, and 15th percentile) should be performed for spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, 10, and 25 Hz, and the peak ground acceleration. A lower-bound magnitude of 5.0

'is recommended.

Step 2 (a) Using the reference probability (1E-5/yr) as de fined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide, determine the ground motion levels for the spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz from the total median hazard ob tained in Step 1.

(b) Calculate the average of the ground motion lev el for the I and 2.5 Hz and the 5 and 10 Hz spectral ac celeration pairs.

Step 3 Perform a complete probabilistic seismic hazard analysis for each of the magnitude-distance bins illustrated in Table C.1. (These magnitude-distance bins are to be used in conjunction with the LLNL or EPRI methods. For other situations, other binning schemes may be necessary.)

Table CA

Recommended Magnitude and Distance Bins Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range

"

of Bin (kn)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

15-25

25-50

50-100

100-200

200 -300

>300

1.165-17

Step 4 From the de-aggregated results of Step 3, the me dian annual probability of exceeding the ground mo tion levels of Step 2(a) (spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5,

5, and 10 Hz) are determined for each magnitude distance bin. These values are denoted by Hmdf.

Using Hmdf values, the fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, P(m,d)1, is computed ac cording to:

(>.lmHf)

-

2 Equation (1)

2 rM

d where f =1 and f =2 represent the ground motion measure at 1 and 2.5 Hz, respectively.

The fractional contribution of each magnitude and distance bin to the total hazard for the average of 5 and

10 Hz, P(md)2, is computed according to:

2 d

2 p

4 Equation (2)

where f = I and f = 2 represent the ground motion measure at 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.

Step S

Review the magnitude-distance distribution for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz to determine whether the con tribution to the hazard for distances of 100 km or great er is substantial (on the order of 5% or greater).

If the contribution to the hazard for distances of

100 km or greater exceeds 5%, additional calculations are needed to determine the controlling earthquakes us ing the magnitude-distance distribution for distances greater than 100 km (63 mi). This distribution, P>loo(md)l, is defined by:

P > 100 (m, d), =

P(m9d)

1 m d>100

Equation (3)

The purpose of this calculation is to identify a dis tant, larger event that may control low-frequency con tent of a response spectrum.

The distance of 100 km is chosen for CEUS sites.

However, for all sites the results of full magnitude distance distribution should be carefully examined to ensure that proper controlling earthquakes are clearly identified.

Step 6 Calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquake associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 5 and

10 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using results of the entire magnitude distance bins matrix:

Me(5-10Hz) = >mEjP(md),

m d

Equation (4)

where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.

The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is determined using results of the entire magnitude distance bins matrix:

Ln{D.(5-10Hz)} = >jLn(d)>jP(md)2 d

m Equation (5)

where d is the centroid distance value for each dis tance bin.

Step 7 If the contribution to the hazard calculated in Step 5 for distances of 100 km or greater exceeds 5% for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, calculate the mean magnitude and distance of the controlling earthquakes associated with the ground motions determined in Step 2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz. The following relation is used to calculate the mean magnitude using calculations based on magnitude-distance bins greater than dis tances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4:

M. (1 - 2.5 Hz)

M

rn P > 100 (m, d)

M

d>100

Equation (6)

where m is the central magnitude value for each magnitude bin.

The mean distance of the controlling earthquake is based on magnitude-distance bins greater than distances of 100 km as discussed in Step 4 and deter mined according to:

1.165-18 I-.

P(M, d)2

Ln {D,(1 - 2.5 Hz)} =

Ln(d)

P > 100(m,d),

d>10

.,

Equation (7)

where d is the centroid distance value for each dis tance bin.

Step 8 Determine the SSE response spectrum using the procedure described in Appendix F of this regulatory guide.

C.3 EXAMPLE FOR A CEUS SITE

To illustrate the procedure in Section C.2, calcula tions are shown here for a CEUS site using the 1993 LLNL hazard results (Refs. C.1 and C.2). It must be emphasized that the recommended magnitude and dis tance bins and procedure used to establish controlling earthquakes were developed for application in the CEUS where the nearby earthquakes generally control the response in the 5 to 10 Hz frequency range, and larg er but distant events can control the lower frequency range. For other situations, alternative binning schemes as well as a study of contributions from various bins will be necessary to identify controlling earthquakes consistent with the distribution of the seismicity.

Step 1 The 1993 LLNL seismic hazard methodology (Refs. C.1 and C.2) was used to determine the hazard at the site. A lower bound magnitude of 5.0 was used in this analysis. The analysis was performed for spectral acceleration at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10Hz. The resultant hazard curves are plotted in Figure C.1.

Step 2 The hazard curves at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz obtained in Step I are assessed at the reference probability value of 1E-5/yr, as defined in Appendix B to this regulatory guide. The corresponding ground motion level values are given in Table C.2. See Figure C.1.

The average of the ground motion levels at the 1 and 2.5 Hz, Sa1-2.5, and 5 and 10 Hz, Sa5-10, are given in Table C.3.

Step 3 The median seismic hazard is de-aggregated for the matrix of magnitude and distance bins as given in Table C.1.

A complete probabilistic hazard analysis was per formed for each bin to determine the contribution to the hazard from all earthquakes within the bin, e.g., all earthquakes with magnitudes 6 to 6.5 and distance 25 to

50 km from the site. See Figure C.2 where the median 1 Hz hazard curve is plotted for distance bin 25 - 50 km and magnitude bin 6 - 6.5.

The hazard vaiues corresponding to the ground motion levels found in step 2, and listed in Table C.2, are then determined from the hazard curve for each bin for spectral accelerations at 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz. This process is illustrated in Figure C.2. The vertical line corresponds to the value 88 cm/s/s listed in Table C.2 for the 1 Hz hazard curve and intersects the hazard curve for the 25 - 50 bin, 6 - 6.5 bin at a hazard value (probability of exceedance) of 2.14E-08 per year.

Tables C.4 to C.7 list the appropriate hazard value for each bin for 1, 2.5, 5, and 10 Hz respectively.

It should be noted that if the median hazard in each of the 35 bins is added up it does not equal

1.0E--05. That is because the sum of the median of each of the bins does not equal the overall median.

However, if we gave the mean hazard for each bin it would add up to the overall mean hazard curve.

Step 4 Using de-aggregated median hazard results, the fractional contribution of each magnitude-distance pair to the total hazard is determined.

Tables C.8 and C.9 show P(m,d)I and P(m,d)2 for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz and 5 and 10 Hz, respectively.

Step 5 Because the contribution of the distance bins greater than 100 km in Table C.8 contains more than

5% of the total hazard for the average of 1 and 2.5 Hz, the controlling earthquake for the spectral average of 1 and 2.5 Hz will be calculated using magnitude-distance bins for distance greater than 100 kmn. Table C.1O

shows P>I00 (md)l for the average of 1 to 2.5 Hz.

1,165-19

,II

Table C.2 Ground Motion Levels Frequency (Hz)

1

1

2.5

5

10

Spectral Acc. (cm/s/s)

I

88

258

351

551 Table C.3 Average Ground Motion Values Sal-2.5 (cm/s/s)

173 S -s.io (cra/s/s)

451 Table C.4 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at I Hz (88 cm/s/s)

Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

1.98E-08

9.44E-08

1.14E-08

0

0

15-25

4.03E-09

2.58E-08

2.40E-09

0

0

25-50

1.72E-09

3.03E-08

2.14E-08

0

0

50-100

2.35E-10

1.53E-08

7.45E-08

2.50E-08

0

100-200

1.OOE-11

2.36E-09

8.53E-08

6.101-07

0

200 - 300

0

1.90E-11

1.60E.-09

1.84E-08

0

> 300

0

0

8.99E-12

1.03E--11

1.69E-10

Table C.5 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 2.5 Hz (258 cm/s/s)

Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6.

6-6.5

6.5 -7

>7

0-15

2.24E-07

3.33E-07

4.12E-08

0

0

15-25

5.39E-08

1.20E-07

1.08E-08

0

0

25-50

2.60E-08

1.68E-07

6.39E-08

0

0

50-100

3.91E-09

6.27E-08

1.46E-07

4.09E-08

0

100-200

1.50E-10

7.801E-09

1.07E-07

4.75E-07

0

200 -300

7.16E-14

2.07E-11

7.47E-10

5.02E-09

0

> 300

0

1.52E-14

4.94E-13

9.05E-15

2.36E-15

1.165-20 -,

K

Magnitude Range of Bin K

Table 0.6 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 5 Hz (351 cm/sls)

Distance Range of Bin (kmi)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

4.96E-07

5.85E-07

5.16E-08

0

0

15-25

9.39E-08

2.02E-07

1.36E-08

  • 0

0

25-50

2.76E-08

1.84E-07.

7.56E-08

0

0

50- 100

1.23E-08

3.34E-08

9.98E-08

2.85E-08

0

100 - 200

8.06E-12

1.14E-09

2.54E-08

1.55E-07

0

200 -300

0

2.39E-13

2.72E-11

4.02E-10

0

> 300

0

0

0

0

0

Table C.7 Median Exceeding Probability Values for Spectral Accelerations at 10 Hz (551 cmlsls)

_ __Magnitude Range of Bin.

Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

1.11E-06

1.12E-06

8.30E-08

0

0

15-25

2.07E-07

3.77E-07

3.12E-08

0

0

25 -50

4.12E-08

235E-07

1.03E-07

0

0

50-100

5.92E-10

2.30E-08

6.89E-08

2.71E-08

0

S100-200

1.26E-12

1.69E-10

6.66E-09

5.43E-08

0

200-300

0

3.90E-15

6.16E-13

2.34E-11

0

> 300

0

0

0

0

0

1.165-21 Magnitude Range of Bin

STable C.8 P(m,d)1 for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability

_

_

_Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

0.083

0.146

0.018

0.000

0.000

15-25

0.020

0.050

0.005

0.000

0.000

25-50

0.009

0.067

0.029

0.000

0.000

50-100

0.001

0.027

0.075

0.022

0.000

100-200

0.000

0.003

0.066

0.370

0.000

200 -300

0.000

0.000

0.001

0.008

0.000

300

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

Table C.9 P(m,d)2 for Average Spectral Accelerations 5 and 10 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability

_________Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

0-15

0.289

0.306

0.024

0.000

0.000

15-25

0.054

0.104

0.008

0.000

0.000

25 -50

0.012

0.075

-

0.032

0.000

0.000

50-100

0.001

0.010

.-0.030

0.010

"

0.000

.100-200

0.000

0.001

0.006

0.038

0.000

200-300

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

- > 300

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

Table C.10

P> 1 00 (m,d)l for Average Spectral Accelerations 1 and 2.5 Hz Corresponding to the Reference Probability Magnitude Range of Bin Distance Range of Bin (km)

5-5.5

5.5-6

6-6.5

6.5-7

>7

100-200

0.000

0.007

0.147

0.826

0.000

200-300

0.000

0.000

0.002

0.018

0.000

>300

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

0.000

1.165-22-

Figures C.3 to C.5 show the above information in terms of the relative percentage contribution.

Steps 6 and 7 To compute the controlling magnitudes and distances at 1 to 2.5 Hz and 5 to 10 Hz for the example site, the values of P> 100 (m,d)l and P(m,d)2 are used with m and d values corresponding to the mid-point of the magnitude of the bin (5.25, 5.75, 6.25, 6.75, 7.3)

and centroid of the ring area (10, 20.4, 38.9, 77.8,

155.6, 253.3, and somewhat arbitrarily 350 km). Note that the mid-point of the last magnitude bin may change because this value is dependent on the maximum mag nitudes used in the hazard analysis. For this example site, the controlling earthquake characteristics (magni tudes and distances) are given in Table C.11.

Step 8 The SSE response spectrum is determined by the procedures described in Appendix F.

C.4 SITES NOT IN THE CEUS

The determination of the controlling earthquakes and the seismic hazard information base for sites not in the CEUS is also carried out using the procedure described in Section C.2 of this appendix. However, because of differences in seismicity rates and ground motion attenuation at these sites, alternative magnitude-distance bins may have to be used. In addi tion, as discussed in Appendix B, an alternative refer ence probability may also have to be developed, par ticularly for sites in the active plate margin region and for sites at which a known tectonic structure dominates the hazard.

Table C.11 Magnitudes and Distances of Controlling Earthquakes from the LLNL Probabilistic Analysis

1-2.51Hz

5 - 10Hz Mc and Dc > 100 km MK and Dc

6.7 and 157 km

5.7 and 17 km

1.165-23

.I

I

II

K

.01. e

"01-0-..,

1H z

.01 e- no."*

~~N.

1 e-6 I

e-8 Ile-9

.

\\ N

le--85

  • .

10

100

1000

Sa ~cm/s**2 Figure C.A Total Median Hazard Curves

1.165-24

.001 le-4

1 e-5 le-6

1 e-7

1 e-8

1 e-9

10

100

1000

Sa - cm/s**2 Figure C.2 1 Hz Median Hazard'Curve for Distance Bin 25 - 50 km & Magnitude Bin 6 - 6.5

1,165-25

Magnitude bins

"D5c

25-50

50-100

0

Distance bins

1020200-300

> 300

Figure C.3 Full Distribution for Average of 5 and 10 Hz K

1.165--26

0

0

"I

'5 0.

35

.0

  • )25

.0

-

15

  • .

O

    • 66.5->7 Magnitude bins

5-5.5

0-15

15-25 "

  • "--*

.*

25-50

50-100 100-200 200-300

Distance bins

> 300

Figure C.4 Full Distribution for Average of 1 and 2.5 Hz

1.165-27 I

I

/>300

200-300

Distance bins Man5 d b6-6.5 Magnitude bins

6.5-7

">7 Figure C.5 Renormalized Hazard Distribution for Distances >100 km for Average of I and 2.5 Hz

1.165-28 K

0.

REFERENCES

C.1 P. Sobel, "Revised Livermore Seismic Hazard Estimates for Sixty-Nine Nuclear Power Plant Sites East of the Rocky Mountains, NUREG-1488, USNRC, April 1994.1 lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC

Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.

C.2 J.B. Savy et al., "Eastern Seismic Hazard Charac terization Update," UCRL-ID-115111, Law rence Livermore National Laboratory, June 1993 (Accession number 9310190318 in NRC's Pub lic Document Room).2

2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC

Public Document Room at 2120 LStreet NW., Washington, DC; thePDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

1.165-29

APPENDIX D

GEOLOGICAL, SEISMOLOGICAL, AND GEOPHYSICAL INVESTIGATIONS

TO CHARACTERIZE SEISMIC SOURCES

D.W

INTRODUCTION

As characterized for use in probabilistic seismic hazard analyses (PSHA), seismic sources are zones within which future earthquakes are likely to occur at the same recurrence rates. Geological, seismological, and geophysical investigations provide the information needed to identify and characterize source parameters, such as size and geometry, and to estimate earthquake recurrence rates and maximum magnitudes. The amount of data available about earthquakes and their causative sources varies substantially between the Western United States (west of the Rocky Mountain front) and the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS), or stable continental region (SCR) (east of the Rocky Mountain front). Furthermore, there are varia tions in the amount and quality of data within these regions.

In active tectonic regions there are both capable tectonic sources and seismogenic sources, and be cause of their relatively high activity rate they may be more readily identified. In the CEUS, identifying seismic sources is less certain because of the difficul ty in correlating earthquake activity with known tec tonic structures, the lack of adequate knowledge about earthquake causes, and the relatively lower ac tivity rate. However, several significant tectonic structures exist and some of these have been inter preted as potential seismogenic sources (e.g., the New Madrid fault zone, Nemaha Ridge, and Meers fault).

In the CEUS there is no single recommended pro cedure to follow to characterize maximum magni tudes associated with such candidate seismogenic sources; therefore, it is most likely that the deter mination of the properties of the seismogenic source, whether it is a tectonic structure or a seismotectonic province, will be inferred rather than demonstrated by strong correlations with seismicity or geologic data. Moreover, it is not generally known what rela tionships exist between observed tectonic structures in a seismic source within the CEUS and the current earthquake activity that may be associated with that source. Generally, the observed tectonic structure re sulted from ancient tectonic forces that are no longer present. The historical seismicity record, the results of regional and site studies, and judgment play key roles. If, on the other hand, strong correlations and data exist suggesting a relationship between seismic ity and seismic sources, approaches used for more ac tive tectonic regions can be applied.

The primary objective of geological, seismologi cal, and geophysical investigations is to develop an up to-date, site-specific earth science data base that sup plements existing information (Ref. D.1). In the CEUS

the results of these investigations will also be used to assess whether new data and their interpretation are consistent with the information used as the basis for ac cepted probabilistic seismic hazard studies. If the new data are consistent with the existing earth science data base, modification of the hazard analysis is not required. For sites in the CEUS where there is signifi cant new information (see Appendix E) provided by the site investigation, and for sites in the Western United States, site-specific seismic sources are to be de termined. It is anticipated that for most sites in the CEUS, new information will have been adequately bounded by existing seismic source interpretations.

The following is a general list of characteristics to be evaluated for a seismic source for site-specific source interpretations:

"*

Source zone geometry (location and extent, both surface and subsurface),

"*

Historical and instrumental seismicity associated with each source,

"*

Paleoseismicity,

Relationship of the potential seismic source to other potential seismic sources in the region,

"*

Seismic potential of the seismic source, based on the source's known characteristics, including seismicity,

"*

Recurrence model (frequency of earthquake oc currence versus magnitude),

"*

Other factors that will be evaluated, depending on the geologic setting of a site, such as:

  • Quaternary (last 2 million years) displace ments (sense of slip on faults, fault length and width, area of the fault plane, age of displace ments, estimated displacement per event, es timated magnitude per offset, segmentation, orientations of regional tectonic stresses with

1.165-30

1%

respect to faults, and displacement history or uplift rates of seismogenic folds),

  • The late Quaternary interaction between faults that compose a fault system and the

-'

interaction between fault systems.

  • Effects of human activities such as withdraw al of fluid from or addition of fluid to the subsurface, extraction of minerals, or the construction of dams and reservoirs,

Volcanism. Volcanic hazard is not addressed in this regulatory guide. It will be considered on a case-by-case basis in regions where a potential for this hazard exists.

D.2. INVESTIGATIONS TO EVALUATE

SEISMIC SOURCES

D.2.1 General Investigations of the site and region around the site are necessary to identify both seismogenic sources and capable tectonic sources and to determine their poten tial for generating earthquakes and causing surface de formation. If it is determined that surface deformation need not be taken into account at the site, sufficient data to clearly justify the determination should be presented in the application for an early site permit, construction permit, operating license, or combined license. Gener ally, any tectonic deformation at the earth's surface within 40 km (25 miles) of the site will require detailed examination to determine its significance. Potentially active tectonic deformation within the seismogenic zone beneath a site will have to be assessed using geo physical and seismological methods to determine its significance.

Engineering solutions are generally available to mitigate the potential vibratory effects of earthquakes through design. However, engineering solutions can not always be demonstrated to be adequate for mitiga tion of the effects of permanent ground displacement phenomena such as surface faulting or folding, subsi dence, or ground collapse. For this reason, it is prudent to select an alternative site when the potential for per manent ground displacement exists at the proposed site (Ref. D.2).

In most of the CEUS, instrumentally located earth quakes seldom bear any relationship to geologic struc tures exposed at the ground surface. Possible geologi cally young fault displacements either do not extend to the ground surface or there is insufficient geologic ma terial of the appropriate age available to date the faults.

Capable tectonic sources are not always exposed at the ground surface in the Western United States as demon- strated by the buried (blind) reverse causative faults of the 1983 Coalinga,1988 Whittier Narrows, 1989 Loma Prieta, and 1994 Northridge earthquakes. These factors emphasize the need to conduct thorough investigations not only at the ground surface but also in the subsurface to identify structures at seismogenic depths.

The level of detail for investigations should be governed by knowledge of the current and late Quater nary tectonic regime and the geological complexity of the site and region. The investigations should be based on increasing the amount of detailed information as they proceed from the regional level down to the site area (e.g., 320 km to 8 km distance from the site).

Whenever faults or other structures are encountered at a site (including sites in the CEUS) in either outcrop or excavations, it is necessary to perform many of the in vestigations described below to determine whether or not they are capable tectonic sources.

The investigations for determining seismic sources should be carried out at three levels, with areas de scribedby radii of 320 km (200 mi), 40 km (25 mi), and

8 km (5 mi) from the site. The level of detail increases closer to the site. The specific site, to a distance of at least 1 km (0.6 mi), should be investigated in more de tail than the other levels.

The regional investigations [within a radius of 320

  • km (200 mi) of the site] should be planned to identify seismic sources and describe the Quaternary tectonic regime. The data should be presented at a scale of

1:500,000 or smaller. The investigations are not ex pected to be extensive or in detail, but should include a comprehensive literature review supplemented by fo cused geological reconnaissances based on the results of the literature study (including topographic, geologic, aeromagnetic, and gravity maps, and airphotos). Some detailed investigations at specific locations within the region may be necessary if potential capable tectonic sources, or seismogenic sources that may be significant for determining the safe shutdown earthquake ground motion, are identified.

The large size of the area for the regional investiga tions is recommended because of the possibility that all significant seismic sources, or alternative configura tions, may not have been enveloped by the LLNL/EPRI

data base. Thus, it will increase the chances of (1) iden tifying evidence for unknown seismic sources that might extend close enough for earthquake ground mo tions generated by that source to affect the site and (2)

confirming the PSHA's data base. Furthermore, be cause of the relatively aseismic nature of the CEUS, the area should be large enough to include as many historical and instrumentally recorded earthquakes for

1.165-31

1 11

'i t

analysis as reasonably possible. The specified area of study is expected to be large enough to incorporate any previously identified sources that could be analogous to sources that may underlie or be relatively close to the site. In past licensing activities for sites in the CEUS, it has often been necessary, because of the absence of dat able horizons overlying bedrock, to extend investiga tions out many tens or hundreds of kilometers from the site along a structure or to an outlying analogous struc ture in order to locate overlying datable strata or uncon formities so that geochronological methods could be applied. This procedure has also been used to estimate the age of an undatable seismic source in the site vicin ity by relating its time of last activity to that of a similar, previously evaluated structure, or a known tectonic epi sode, the evidencý of which may be many tens or hundreds of miles away.

In the Western United States it is often necessary to extend the investigations to great distances (up to hundreds of kilometers) to characterize a major tectonic structure, such as the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault Zone and the Juan de Fuca Subduction Zone. On the other hand, in the Western United States it is not usually nec essary to extend the regional investigations that far in all directions. For example, for a site such as Diablo Canyon, which is near the San Gregorio-Hosgri Fault, it would not be necessary to extend the regional inves tigations farther east than the dominant San Andreas Fault, which is about 75 km (45 mi) from the site; nor west beyond the Santa Lucia Banks Fault, which is about 45 km (27 mi). Justification for using lesser dis tances should be provided.

Reconnaissance-level investigations, which may need to be supplemented at specific -locations by more detailed explorations such as geologic mapping, geo physical surveying, borings, and trenching, should be conducted to a distance of 40 km (25 mi) from the site;

the data should be presented at a scale of 1:50,000 or smaller.

Detailed investigations should be carried out with in a radius of 8 km (5 mi) from the site, and the resulting data should be presented at a scale of 1:5,000 or smaller.

The level of investigations should be in sufficient detail to delineate the geology and the potential for tectonic deformation at or near the ground surface. The inves tigations should use the methods described in subsec tions D.2.2 and D.2.3 that are appropriate for the tec tonic regime to characterize seismic sources.

The areas of investigations may be asymmetrical and may cover larger areas than those described above in regions of late Quaternary activity, regions with high rates of historical seismic activity (felt or instrumen tally recorded data), or sites that are located near a capa ble tectonic source such as a fault zone.

Data from investigations at the site (approximately

1 square kilometer) should be presented at a scale of

1:500 or smaller. Important aspects of the site inves tigations are the excavation and logging of exploratory trenches and the mapping of the excavations for the plant structures, particularly plant structures that are characterized as Seismic Category I. In addition to geo logical, geophysical, and seismological investigations, detailed geotechnical engineering investigations as de scribed in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3) should be conducted at the site.

The investigations needed to assess the Suitabil ity of the site with respect to effects of potential ground motions and surface deformation should in clude determination of (1) the lithologic, stratigraph ic, geomorphic, hydrologic, geotechnical, and struc tural geologic characteristics of the site and the area surrounding the site, including its seismicity and geological history, (2) geological evidence of fault offset or other distortion such as folding at or near ground surface within the site area (8 km radius), and

(3) whether or not any faults or other tectonic struc tures, any part of which are within a radius of 8 km (5 mi) from the site, are capable tectonic sources. This information will be used to evaluate tectonic struc tures underlying the site area, whether buried or ex pressed at the surface, with regard to their potential for generating earthquakes and for causing surface deformation at or near the site. This partof the evalua tion should also consider the possible effects caused by human activities such as withdrawal of fluid from or addition of fluid to the subsurface, extraction of minerals, or the loading effects of dams and reser voirs.

D.1.2 Reconnaissance Investigations, Literature Review, and Other Sources of Preliminary Information Regional literature and reconnaissance-level in vestigations can be planned based on reviews of avail able documents and the results of previous investiga tions. Possible sources of information may include universities, consulting firms, and government agen cies. A detailed list of possible sources of information is given in Regulatory Guide 1.132 (Ref. D.3).

D.2.3 Detailed Site Vicinity and Site Area Investigations The following methods are suggested but they are not all-inclusive and investigations should not be limit ed to them. Some procedures will not be applicable to

1.165-32 K

every site, and situations will occur that require inves tigations that are not included in the following discus sion. It is anticipated that new technologies will be available in the future that will be applicable to these investigations.

D.2.3.1 Surface Investigations Surface exploration needed to assess the neotec tonic regime and the geology of the area around the site is dependent on the site location and may be carried out with the use of any appropriate combination of the geo logical, geophysical, seismological, and geotechnical engineering techniques summarized in the following paragraphs and Ref. D.3. However, not all of these methods must be carried out at a given site.

D.2.3.1.1.

Geological interpretations of aerial photographs and other remote-sensing imagery, as ap propriate for the particular site conditions, to assist in identifying rock outcrops, faults and other tectonic fea tures, fracture traces, geologic contacts, lineaments, soil conditions, and evidence of landslides or soil liquefaction.

D.2.3.1.2.

Mapping of topographic, geologic, geomorphic, and hydrologic features at scales and with contour intervals suitable for analysis, stratigraphy (particularly Quaternary), surface tectonic structures such as fault zones, and Quaternary geomorphic fea tures. For offshore sites, coastal sites, or sites located near lakes or rivers, this includes topography, geo morphology (particularly mapping marine and fluvial terraces), bathymetry, geophysics (such as seismic re flection), and hydrographic surveys to the extent need ed for evaluation.

D.2.3.1.3.

Identification and evaluation of verti cal crustal movements by (1) geodetic land surveying to identify and measure short-term crustal movements (Refs. D.4 and D.5) and (2) geological analyses such as analysis of regional dissection and degradation pat terns, marine and lacustrine terraces and shorelines, fluvial adjustments such as changes in stream longitu dinal profiles or terraces, and other long-term changes such as elevation changes across lava flows (Ref. D.6).

D.2.3.1.4.

Analysis of offset, displaced, or anomalous landforms such as displaced stream chan nels or changes in stream profiles or the upstream migration of knickpoints (Refs. D.7 through D.12);

abrupt changes in fluvial deposits or terraces; changes in paleochannels across a fault (Refs. D.11 and D.12);

or uplifted, downdropped, or laterally displaced marine terraces (Ref. D.12).

D.2.3.1.5.

Analysis of Quaternary sedimentary deposits within or near tectonic zones, such as fault zones, including (1) fault-related or fault-controlled de posits such as sag ponds, graben fill deposits, and collu vial wedges formed by the erosion of a fault paleoscarp and (2) non-fault-related, but offset, deposits such as al luvial fans, debris cones, fluvial terrace, and lake shore line deposits.

D.2.3.1.6.

Identification and analysis of de formation features caused by vibratory ground mo tions, including seismically induced liquefaction fea tures (sand boils, explosion craters, lateral spreads, settlement, soil flows), mud volcanoes, landslides, rockfalls, deformed lake deposits or soil horizons, shear zones, cracks or fissures (Refs. D.13 and D.14).

D.2.3.1.7.

Analysis of fault displacements, such as by the interpretion of the morphology of topographic fault scarps associated with or produced by surface rup ture. Fault scarp morphology is useful in estimating the age of last displacement (in conjunction with the ap propriate geochronological methods described in Sub section D.2.4, approximate size of the earthquake, re currence intervals, slip rate, and the nature of the c ausative fault at depth (Refs. D.15 through D.18).

D.2.3.2 Seismological Investigations D.2.3.2.1.

Listing of all historically reported earthquakes having Modified Mercalli Intensity (MMI) greater than or equal to IV or magnitude greater than or equal to 3.0 that can reasonably be associated with seismic sources, any part of which is within a ra dius of 320 km (200 miles) of the site (the site region).

The earthquake descriptions should include the date of occurrence and measured or estimated data on the high est intensity, magnitude, epicenter, depth, focal mecha nism, and stress drop. Historical seismicity includes both historically reported and instrumentally recorded data. For earthquakes without instrumentally recorded data or calculated magnitudes, intensity should be con verted to magnitude, the procedure used to convert it to magnitude should be clearly documented, and epicen ters should be determined based on intensity distribu tions. Methods to convert intensity values to magni tudes in the CEUS are described in References D.1 and D.19 through D.21.

D.2.3.2.2.

Seismic monitoring in the site area should be established as soon as possible after site selection. For sites in both the CEUS and WUS, a single large dyn amic range, broad-band seismograph, and a network of short period instruments to locate events should be deployed around the site area.

1.165-33

The data obtained by monitoring current seismic ity will be used, along with the much larger data base acquired from site investigations, to evaluate site re sponse and to provide information about whether there are significant sources of earthquakes within the site vicinity, or to provide data by which an existing source can be characterized.

Monitoring should be initiated as soon as practica ble at the site, preferably at least five years prior to construction of a nuclear unit at a site, and should con tinue at least until the free field seismic monitoring strong ground motion instrumentation described in Regulatory Guide 1.12 (Ref. D.22) is operational.

D.2.33 Subsurface Investigations Ref. D.3 describes geological, geotechnical, and geophysical investigation techniques that can be ap plied to explore the subsurface beneath the site and in the region around the site, therefore, only a brief sum mary is provided in this section. Subsurface investiga tions in the site area and vicinity to identify and define seismogenic sources and capable tectonic sources may'

include the following.

D.2.3.3.1.

Geophysical investigations that have been useful in the past include, for example, magnetic and gravity surveys, seismic reflection and seismic re fraction surveys, borehole geophysics, electrical sur veys, and ground-penetrating radar surveys.

D.2.33.2.

Core borings to map subsurface geol ogy and obtain samples for testing such as determining the properties of the subsurface soils and rocks and geo chronological analysis.

D.2.3.3.3.

Excavating and logging of trenches across geological features as part of the neotectonic in vestigation and to obtain samples for the geochrono logical analysis of those features.

At some sites, deep unconsolidated material/soil, bodies of water, or other material may obscure geologic evidence of past activity along a tectonic structure. In such cases, the analysis of evidence elsewhere along the structure can be used to evaluate its characteristics in the vicinity of the site (Refs. D.12 and D.23).

D.2.4 Geochronology An important part of the geologic investigations to identify and define potential seismic sources is the geo chronology of geologic materials. An acceptable clas sification of dating methods is based on the rationale described in Reference D.24. The following tech niques, which are presented according to that classifi cation, are useful in dating Quaternary deposits. A de- tailed discussion of each of these methods and their application to nuclear power plant siting is presented in a document that is currently under preparation and will be published as a NUREG.1 D.2.4.1

0

0

0

D.2.4.2

0

S

0

0

0

0

D+/-4.4 S

0

0

Sidereal Dating Methods Dendrochronology Varve chronology Schlerochronology Isotopic Dating Methods Radiocarbon Cosmogenic nuclides -M36

, 1OBe, 21pb, and 26A1 Potassium argon and argon-39-argon-40

Uranium series - 234U-23°'h and 235U

231Pa

2 10Lead Uranium-lead, thorium-lead Radiogenic Dating Methods Fission track Luminescence (TL and OSL)

Electron spin resonance (ESR)

D.2.4.5 Chemical and Biological Dating Methods

0

0

0

D.2.4.6 S

0

0

Amino acid racemization Obsidian and tephra hydration Lichenometry Geomorphic Dating Methods Soil profile development Rock and mineral weathering Scarp morphology D.2.4.7 Correlation Dating Methods

  • Paleomagnetism (secular variation and re versal stratigraphy)

Tephrochronology

0

S

Paleontology (marine and terrestrial)

Global climatic correlations - Quaternary deposits and landforms, marine stable iso tope records, etc.

1NUREG/CR-5562, "Quaternary Geochronology: Applications in Qua.

ternary Geology and Paleoseismology," Editors H.S. Noller, LM. Sow.

era, and W.R. Lettis, will be published in the spring of 1997. Copies will be available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington. DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; telephone

(202)634-3273; fax (202)53-41-3343.

K

1.165-34

In the CEUS, it may not be possible to reasonably demonstrate the age of last activity of a tectonic struc ture. In such cases the NRC staff will accept association of such structures with geologic structural features or tectonic processes that are geologically old (at least pre Quaternary) as an age indicator in the absence of con flicting evidence.

These investigative procedures should also be ap plied, where possible, to characterize offshore struc tures (faults or fault zones, and folds, uplift, or subsi dence related to faulting at depth) for coastal sites or those sites located adjacent to landlocked bodies of water. Investigations of offshore structures will rely heavily on seismicity, geophysics, and bathymetry rather than conventional geologic mapping methods that normally can be used effectively onshore. Howev er, it is often useful to investigate similar features on shore to learn more about the significant offshore fea tures.

D.2.5 Distinction Between Tectonic and Nontectonic Deformation At a site, both nontectonic deformation and tecton ic deformation can pose a substantial hazard to nuclear power plants, but there are likely to be differences in the approaches used to resolve the issues raised by the two

-"

types of phenomena. Therefore, nontectonic deforma tion should be distinguished from tectonic deformation at a site. In past nuclear power plant licensing activities, surface displacements caused by phenomena other than tectonic phenomena have been confused with tectoni cally induced faulting. Such features include faults on which the last displacement was induced by glaciation or deglaciation; collapse structures, such as found in karst terrain; and growth faulting, such as occurs in the Gulf Coastal Plain or in other deep soil regions sub ject to extensive subsurface fluid withdrawal.

Glacially induced faults generally do not represent a deep-seated seismic or fault displacement hazard be cause the conditions that created them are no longer present. However, residual stresses from Pleistocene glaciation may still be present in glaciated regions, al though they are of less concern than active tectonically induced stresses. These features should be investigated with respect to their relationship to current in situ stresses.

The nature of faults related to collapse features can usually be defined through geotechnical investigations and can either be avoided or, if feasible, adequate engi neering fixes can be provided.

Large, naturally occurring growth faults as found in the coastal plain of Texas and Louisiana can pose a surface displacement hazard, even though offset most likely occurs at a much less rapid rate than that of tec

"tonic faults. They are not regarded as having the capac ity to generate damaging vibratory ground motion, can often be identified and avoided in siting, and their dis placements can be monitored. Some growth faults and antithetic faults related to growth faults are not easily identified; therefore, investigations described above with respect to capable faults and fault zones should be applied in regions where growth faults are known to be present. Local human-induced growth faulting can be monitored and controlled or avoided.

.

If questionable features cannot be demonstrated to be of nontectonic origin, they should be treated as tec tonic deformation.

1.165-35 I II

f I

REFERENCES

D.1 Electric Power Research Institute, "Seismic Haz ard Methodology for the Central and Eastern United States," EPRI NP-4726,, All Volumes,

1988 through.1991, D.2 International Atomic Energy Agency, "Earth quakes and Associated Topics in Relation to Nu clear Power Plant Siting,"

Safety Series No. 50-SG-S1, Revision 1, 1991.

D.3 USNRC, "Site Investigations for Foundations of Nuclear Power Plants,"

Regulatory Guide

1.132.1 D.4 R. Reilinger, M. Bevis, and G. Jurkowski, "Tilt from Releveling: An Overview of the U.S. Data Base," Tectonophysics, Volume 107, pp. 315

330, 1984.

D.5 R.K. Mark et al., "An Assessment of the Accura cy of the Geodetic Measurements that Led to the Recognition of the'Southern California Uplift,"

Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 86, pp. 2783-2808, 1981.

D.6 T.K. Rockwell et al., "Chronology and Rates of Faulting of Ventura River Terraces, California,"

Geological Society ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume

95, pp. 1466-1474, 1984.

D.7 K.E. Sieh, "Lateral Offsets and Revised Dates of Prehistoric Earthquakes at Pallett Creet, South ern California," Journal of Geophysical Re search, Volume 89, No. 89, pp. 7641-7670,

1984.

D.8 K.E. Sieh and R.H. Jahns, "Holocene Activity of the San Andreas Fault at Wallace Creek, Califor nia," Geological Society of America Bulletin, Volume 95, pp. 883-896, 1984.

D.9 K.E. Sieh, M. Stuiver, and D. Brillinger, "A More Precise Chronology of Earthquakes Produced by the San Andreas Fault in Southern California,"

ISingle copies of the regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555, or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,

Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL,-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

Journal of Geophysical Research, Volume 94, pp. 603-623, 1989.

D.10 R.J. Weldon, III, and K.E. Sieh, "Holocene Rate of Slip and Tentative Recurrence Interval for Large Earthquakes on the San Andreas Fault, Ca jon Pass, Southern California," Geological Soci ety ofAmerica Bulletin, Volume 96, pp. 793-812,

1985.

D.11 F.H. Swan, III, D.P. Schwartz, and LS. Cluff,

"Recurrence of Moderate to Large Magnitude Earthquakes Produced by Surface Faulting on the Wasatch Fault Zone," Bulletin of the Seismologi cal Society of America, Volume 70, pp,

1431-1462, 1980.

D.12 Pacific Gas and Electric Company, "Final Report of the Diablo Canyon Long Term Seismic Pro gram; Diablo Canyon Power Plant;" Docket Nos.

50-275 and 50-323, 1988.2 D.13 S.F. Obermeier et al., "Geologic Evidence for Re current Moderate to Large Earthquakes Near Charleston, South Carolina," Science, Volume

227, pp. 408-411, 1985.

D.14 D. Amick et al., "Paleoliquefaction Features Along the Atlantic Seaboard," U.S. Nuclear Reg ulatory Commission, NUREG/CR-5613, Octo ber 1990.3 D.15 R.E. Wallace, "Profiles and Ages of Young Fault Scarps, North-Central Nevada," Geological So ciety of America Bulletin, Volume 88, pp. 1267

1281, 1977.

D.16 R.E. Wallace, "Discussion-Nomographs for Estimating Components of Fault Displacement from Measured Height of Fault Scarp," Bulletin of the Association of Engineering Geologists, Volume 17, pp. 39-45, 1980.

2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC

Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

3Copies are available for inspection or copying for It fee from the NRC

Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249; or from the National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Port Roal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.

1,165-36 K

D.17 R.E. Wallace, "Active Faults, Paleoseismology, and Earthquake Hazards: Earthquake Predic tion-An International Review," Maurice Ewing Series 4, American Geo1physical Union, pp.

209-216, 1981.

D.18 A.J. Crone and S.T. Harding, "Relationship of Late Quaternary Fault Scarps to Subjacent Faults, Eastern Great Basin, Utah," Geology, Vol ume 12, pp. 292-295, 1984.

D.19 O.W. Nuttli, "The Relation of Sustained Maxi mum Ground Acceleration and Velocity to Earth quake Intensity and Magnitude, State-of- the-Art for Assessing Earthquake Hazards in the Eastern United States," U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Misc. Paper 5-73-1, Report 16, 1979.

D.20 R.L. Street and F.T. Turcotte, "A Study of North eastern North America Spectral Moments, Mag nitudes and Intensities," Bulletin of the Seismo- logical Society of America, Volume

67, pp. 599-614, 1977.

D.21 R.L. Street and A. Lacroix, "An Empirical Study of New England Seismicity," Bulletin of the Seis mological Society of America, Volume 69, pp.

159-176, 1979.

D.22 USNRC, "Nuclear Power Plant Instrumentation for Earthquakes," Regulatory Guide 1.12, Revi sion 2.1 D.23 H. Rood et al., "Safety Evaluation Report Related to the Operation of Diablo Canyon Nuclear Pow er Plant, Units I and 2," USNRC, NUREG-0675, Supplement No. 34, June 1991.3 D.24 S.M. Colman, K.L Pierce, and P.W. Birkeland,

"Suggested Terminology for Quaternary Dating Methods," Quaternary Research, Volume 288, pp. 314-319, 1987.

1.165-37

1 1

APPENDIX E

PROCEDURE FOR THE EVALUATION OF NEW GEOSCIENCES INFORMATION

OBTAINED FROM THE SITE-SPECIFIC INVESTIGATIONS

E.1 INTRODUCTION

This appendix provides methods acceptable to the NRC staff for assessing the impact of new information obtained during site-specific investigations on the data base used for the probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA).

Regulatory Position 4 in this guide describes, ac ceptable PSHAs that were developed by Lawrence Liv ermore National Laboratories (LLNL) and the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) to characterize the seismic hazard for nuclear power plants and to develop the Safe Shutdown Earthquake ground motion (SSE).

The procedure to determine the SSE outlined in this guide relies primarily on either the LLNL or EPRI

PSHA results for the Central and Eastern United States (CEUS).

It is necessary to evaluate the geological, seismo logical, and geophysical data obtained from the site specific investigations to demonstrate that these data are consistent with the PSHA data bases of these two methodologies. If new information identified by the site-specific investigations would result in a significant increase in the hazard estimate for a site, and this new information is validated by a strong technical basis, the PSHA may have to be modified to incorporate the new technical information. Using sensitivity studies, it may also be possible to justify a lower hazard estimate with an exceptionally strong technical basis. However, it is expected that large uncertainties in estimating seismic hazard in the CEUS will continue to exist in the future, and substantial delays in the licensing process will re sult from trying to justify a lower value with respect to a specific site.

In general, major recomputations of the LLNL and EPRI data base are planned periodically (approximate ly every ten years), or when there is an important new finding or occurrence. The overall revision of the data base will also require a reexamination of the reference probability discussed in Appendix B.

E.2 POSSIBLE SOURCES OF NEW

INFORMATION THAT COULD AFFECT

THE SSE

Types of new data that could affect the PSHA re sults can be put in three general categories: seismic sources, earthquake recurrence models or rates of de formation, and ground motion models.

E.2.1 Seismic Sources There are several possible sources of new informa tion from the site-specific investigations that could af fect the seismic hazard. Continued recording of small earthquakes, including microearthquakes, may indi cate the presence of a localized seismic source. Paleo seismic evidence, such as paleoliquefaction features or displaced Quaternary strata, may indicate the presence of a previously unknown tectonic structure or a larger amount of activity on a known structure than was pre viously considered. Geophysical studies (aeromagnet ic, gravity, and seismic reflection/refraction) may iden tify ckustal structures that suggest the presence of previously unknown seismic sources. In situ stress measurements and the mapping of tectonic structures in the future may indicate potential seismic sources.

Detailed local site investigations often reveal faults or other tectonic structures that were unknown, or re veal additional characteristics of known tectonic struc tures. Generally, based on past licensing experience in the CEUS, the discovery of such features will not re quire a modification of the seismic sources provided in the LLNL and EPRI studies. However, initial evidence regarding a newly discovered tectonic structure in the CEUS is often equivocal with respect to activity, and additional detailed investigations are required. By means of these detailed investigations, and based on past licensing activities, previously unidentified tec tonic structures can usually be shown to be inactive or otherwise insignificant to the seismic design basis of the facility, and a modification of the seismic sources provided by the LLNL and EPRI studies will not be re quired. On the other hand, if the newly discovered fea tures are relatively young, possibly associated with earthquakes that were large and could impact the haz ard for the proposed facility, a modification may be required.

Of particular concern is the possible existence of previously unknown, potentially active tectonic struc tures that could have moderately sized, but potentially damaging, near-field earthquakes or could cause sur face displacement. Also of concern is the presence of structures that could generate larger earthquakes within the region than previously estimated.

Investigations to determine whether there is a pos sibility for permanent ground displacement are espe-'

cially important in view of the provision to allow for a

1.165r38

combined licensing procedure under 10 CFR Part 52 as an alternative to the two-step procedure of the past (Construction Permit and Operating License). In the

~j past at numerous nuclear power plant sites, potentially significant faults were identified when excavations were made during the construction phase prior to the is suance of an operating license, and extensive additional investigations of those faults had to be carried out to properly characterize them.

E.2.2 Earthquake Recurrence Models There are three elements of the source zone's recur rence models that could be affected by new site-specific data: (1) the rate of occurrence of earthquakes, (2) their maximum magnitude, and (3) the form of the recur rence model, for example, a change from truncated ex ponential to a characteristic earthquake model. Among the new site-specific information that is most likely to have a significant impact on the hazard is the discovery of paleoseismic evidence such as extensive soil lique faction features, which would indicate with reasonable confidence that much larger estimates of the maximum earthquake than those predicted by the previous studies would ensue. The paleoseismic data could also be sig nificant even if the maximum magnitudes of the pre vious studies are consistent with the paleo-earthquakes if there are sufficient data to develop return period esti mates significantly shorter than those previously used in the probabilistic analysis. The paleoseismic data could also indicate that a characteristic earthquake model would be more applicable than a truncated expo nential model.

In the future, expanded earthquake catalogs will become available that will differ from the catalogs used by the previous studies. Generally, these new cata logues have been shown to have only minor impacts on estimates of the parameters of the recurrence models.

Cases that might be significant include the discovery of records that indicate earthquakes in a region that had no seismic activity in the previous catalogs, the occur rence of an earthquake larger than the largest historic earthquakes, re-evaluating the largest historic earth quake to a significantly larger magnitude, or the occur rence of one or more moderate to large earthquakes (magnitude 5.0 or greater) in the CEUS.

Geodetic measurements, particularly satellite

  • based networks, may provide data and interpretations of rates and styles of deformation in the CEUS that can have implications for earthquake recurrence. New hy potheses regarding present-day tectonics based on new data or reinterpretation of old data may be developed that were not considered or given high weight in the EPRI or LLNL PSHA. Any of these cases could have an impact on the estimated maximum earthquake if the result is larger than the values provided by LLNL and EPRI.

E.2.3 Ground Motion Attenuation Models Alternative ground motion models may be used to determine the site-specific spectral shape as discussed in Regulatory Position 4 and Appendix F of this regula tory guide. If the ground motion models used are a ma jor departure from the original models used in the haz ard analysis and are likely to have impacts on the hazard results of many sites, a reevaluation of the reference probability may be needed using the procedure dis cussed in Appendix B. Otherwise, a periodic (e.g.,

every ten years) reexamination of PSHA and the associ ated data base is considered appropriate to incorporate new understanding regarding ground motion models.

E.3 PROCEDURE AND EVALUATION

The EPRI and LLNL studies provide a wide range of interpretations of the possible seismic sources for most regions of the CEUS, as well as a wide range of interpretations for all the key parameters of the seismic hazard model. The first step in comparing the new in formation with those interpretations is determining whether the new information is consistent with the fol lowing LLNL and EPRI parameters: (1) the range of seismogenic sources as interpreted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the study, (2) the range of seismicity rates for the region around the site as inter preted by the seismicity experts or teams involved in the studies, and (3) the range of maximum magnitudes determined by the seismicity experts or teams. The new information is considered not significant and no further evaluation is needed if it is consistent with the assump tions used in the PSHA, no additional alternative seis mic sources or seismic parameters are needed, or it sup ports maintaining or decreasing the site median seismic hazard.

An example is an additional nuclear unit sited near an existing nuclear power plant site that was recently investigated by state-of-the-art geosciences techniques and evaluated by current hazard methodologies. De tailed geological, seismological, and geophysical site specific investigations would be required to update ex isting information regarding the new site, but it is very unlikely that significant new information would be found that would invalidate the previous PSHA.

On the other hand, after evaluating the results of the site-specific investigations, if there is still uncertainty about whether the new information will affect the esti mated hazard, it will be necessary to evaluate the

1.165-39 I I

potential impact of the new data and interpretations on the median of the range of the input parameters. Such new information may indicate the addition of a new seismic source, a change in the rate of activity, a change in the spatial patterns of seismicity, an increase in the rate of deformation, or the observation of a relationship between tectonic structures and current seismicity. The new findings should be assessed by comparing them with the specific input of each expert or team that par ticipated in the PSHA. Regarding a new source, for ex ample, the specific seismic source characterizations for each expert or team (such as tectonic feature being modeled, source geometry, probability of being active, maximum earthquake magnitude, or occurrence rates)

should be assessed in the context of the significant new data and interpretations.

It is expected that the new information will be with in the range of interpretations in the existing data base, and the data will not result in an increase in overall seis micity rate or increase in the range of maximum earth quakes to be used in the probabilistic analysis. It can then be concluded that the current LLNL or EPRI re sults apply. It is possible that the new data may necessi tate a change in some parameter. In this case, appropri ate sensitivity analyses should be performed to determine whether the new site-specific data could affect the ground motion estimates at the reference probability level.

An example is a consideration of the seismic haz ard near the Wabash River Valley (Ref. E.1). Geologi cal evidence found recently within the Wabash River Valley and several of its tributaries indicated that an earthquake much larger than any historic event had oc curred several thousand years ago in the vicinity of Vin cennes, Indiana. A review of the inputs by the experts and teams involved in the LLNL and EPRI PSHAs re vealed that many of them had made allowance for this possibility in their tectonic models by assuming the ex tension of the New Madrid Seismic Zone northward into the Wabash Valley. Several experts had given strong weight to the relatively high seismicity of the area, including the number of magnitude 5 historic earthquakes that have occurred, and thus had assumed the larger event. This analysis of the source character izations of the experts and teams resulted in the conclu sion by the analysts that a new PSHA would not be nec essary for this region because an event similar to the prehistoric earthquake had been considered in the exist ing PSHAs.

A third step would be required if the site-specific geosciences investigations revealed significant new in formation that would substantially affect the estimated hazard. Modification of the seismic sources would more than likely be required if the results of the detailed local and regional site investigations indicate that a pre viously unknown seismic source is identified in the vi cinity of the site. A hypothetical example would be the recognition of geological evidence of recent activity on a fault near a nuclear power plant site in the stable conti nental region (SCR) similar to the evidence found on the Meers Fault in Oklahoma (Ref, E.2). If such a source is identified, the same approach used in the ac tive tectonic regions of the Western United States should be used to assess the largest earthquake ex pected and the rate of activity. If the resulting maximum earthquake and the rate of activity are higher than those provided by the LL.L or EPRI experts or teams regard ing seismic sources within the region in which this newly discovered tectonic source is located, it may be necessary to modify the existing interpretations by introducing the new seismic source and developing modified seismic hazard estimates for the site. The same would be true if the current ground motion mod els are a major departure from the original models.

These occurrences would likely require performing a new PSHA using the updated data base, and may re quire determining the appropriate reference probability in accordance with the procedure described in Appendix B.

1.165-40

K

REFERENCES

E.1 Memorandum from A. Murphy, NRC, to Shao, NRC, Subject: Summary of a Public Me ing on the Revision of Appendix A, "Seismic a Geologic Siting Criteria for Nuclear Poi Plants," to 10 CFR Part 100; Enclosure (Vie graphs): NUMARC, "Development and Demn stration of Industry's Integrated Seismic Sit Decision Process," February 23, 1993.1 lCopies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NI

Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC;

PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; 1 phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

L.

E.2 A.R. Ramelli, D.B. Slemmons, and S.J. Bro

et- coum, "The Meers Fault: Tectonic Activity in md Southwestern Oklahoma," NUREG/CR-4852, Ver USNRC, March 1987.2 On ing

2Copies are available for inspection or copying for a fee from the NRC

Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW., Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Washington, DC 20555; tele phone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343. Copies may be purchased at RC

current rates from the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 37082, the Washington, DC 20402-9328 (telephone (202)512-2249); or from the ele- National Technical Information Service by writing NTIS at 5285 Pon Royal Road, Springfield, VA 22161.

1.165-41

. I

t I

APPENDIX F

PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE THE

SAFE SHUTDOWN EARTHQUAKE GROUND MOTION

F.1 INTRODUCTION

This appendix elaborates on Step 4 of Regulatory Position 4 of this guide, which describes an acceptable procedure to determine the Safe Shutdown Earthquake Ground Motion (SSE). The SSE is defined in terms of the horizontal and vertical free-field ground motion re sponse spectra at the free ground surface. It is devel oped with consideration of local site effects and site seismic wave transmission effects. The SSE response spectrum can be determined by scaling a site-specific spectral shape determined for the controlling earth quakes or by scaling a standard broad-band spectral shape to envelope the average of the ground motion lev els for 5 and 10 Hz (Sa,5-10), and 1 and 2.5 Hz (Sa,1-2.5)

as determined in Step C.2 of Appendix C to this guide.

It is anticipated that a regulatory guide will be de veloped that provides guidance on assessing site specific effects and determining smooth design re sponse spectra, taking into account recent develop ments in ground motion modeling and site amplifica tion studies (e.g., Ref. F.1).

F.2 DISCUSSION

For engineering purposes, it is essential that the de sign ground motion response spectrum be a broad-band smooth response spectrum with adequate energy in the frequencies of interest. In the past, it was general prac tice to select a standard broad-band spectrum, such as the spectrum in Regulatory Guide 1.60 (Ref. F.2), and scale it by a peak ground motion parameter (usually peak ground acceleration (PGA)), which is derived based on the size of the controlling earthquake. During the licensing review this spectrum was checked against site-specific spectral estimates derived using Standard Review Plan Section 2.5.2 procedures to be sure that the SSE design spectrum adequately enveloped the site-specific spectrum. These past practices to define the SSE are still valid and, based on this consideration, the following three possible situations are depicted in Figures F.1 to F.3.

Figure F. 1 depicts a situation in which a site is to be used for a certified design with an established SSE (for instance, an Advanced light Water Reactor with 0.3g PGA SSE). In this example, the certified design SSE

spectrum compares favorably with the site-specific re sponse spectra determined in Step 2 or 3 of Regulatory Position 4.

Figure F.2 depicts a situation in which a standard broad-band shape is selected and its amplitude is scaled so that the design SSE envelopes the site-specific spec tra.

Figure F.3 depicts a situation in which a specific smooth shape for the design SSE spectrum is developed to envelope the site-specific spectra. In this case, it is particularly important to be sure that the SSE contains adequate energy in the frequency range of engineering interest and is sufficiently broad-band.

1.165=42

r

0

LU

S8.1.

1.75

7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.1 Use of SSE Spectrum of a Certified Design

0

SIP-10

0 ..

...

"

Modified or

0

5, Unmodified

" '8*-

S

\\, Standard SI

CO

hape

1.75

7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.2 Use of a Standard Shape for SSE

Smooth Broad-Band Spectrum

1.75

7.5 Frequency, Hz Figure F.3 Development of a Site-Specific SSE Spectrum (Note: the above figures illustrate situations for a rock site. For other site conditions, the SSE spectra are compared at free-field after performing site amplification studies as discussed in Step 4 of Regulatory Position 4.)

1.165-43

0

CO

I I

i ti

REFERENCES

F.1 Electric Power Research Institute, "Guidelines for Determining Design Basis Ground Motions,"

EPRI Report TR-102293, Volumes 1-4, May

1993.1 tCopies may beobtained from the EPRI Distribution Center, 207 Coggins Drive, Pleasant Hill, CA 94523; phone (510)934-4212.

F.2 USNRC, "Design Response Spectra for Seismic Design of Nuclear Power Plants," Regulatory Guide 1.60.21

2Single copies of regulatory guides, both active and draft, may be ob tained free of charge by writing the Office of Administration, Attn: Dis tribution and Mail Services Section, USNRC, Washington, DC 20555; or by fax at (301)415-2260. Copies are available for inspection orcopying for a fee from the NRC Public Document Room at 2120 L Street NW.,

Washington, DC; the PDR's mailing address is Mail Stop LL-6, Wash ington, DC 20555; telephone (202)634-3273; fax (202)634-3343.

1.165-44

REGULATORY ANALYSIS

A separate regulatory analysis was not prepared for this regulatory guide. The regulatory analysis, "Revi sion of 10 CFR Part 100 and 10 CFR Part 50," was pre pared for the amendments, and it provides the regulato ry basis for this guide and examines the costs and benefits of the rule as implemented by the guide. A

copy of the regulatory analysis is available for inspec tion and copying for a fee at the NRC Public Document Room, 2120 L Street NW. (Lower Level), Washington, DC, as Attachment 7 to SECY-96-118.

1.165-45 I I I

i I

on mr R

cyclPraed Federai Recycling ProgramK

I

.

UNITED STATES

NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20555-0001 OFICIAL BUSINESS

PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300

FIRST CUSS MAIL

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

USNRC

PERMWf NO. G-67